Zafira Owners Manual - Jan07

ZAFIRA
Owners Manual Operation, Safety and Maintenance
Data specific to your vehicle Fuel

De signation
Please enter your vehicles d ata here to keep it ea sily acc essible. This inform ation is available under the section " Technical data" as well as on the identifica tion plate and in the Service Book let.
Engine oil
Grade Viscosity
Tyre pressure
Tyre size Summer tyres Winter tyres Front Front with up to 3 pe ople Rear Rear Front Front with full load Rear Rear
Weights
Pe rmissible Gross Vehicle Weight = EC ke rbweight L oading
Your Zafira
is an intelligent c om bina tion of forwardlooking technology, impressiv e safety , env ironmenta l friendliness a nd economy. It now lies with you to drive your vehicle safely and ensure that it perform s perfectly. This O wners Manual provides you with all the necessary information to that end. Make sure y our pa ssengers a re awa re of the p ossible risk of accid ent and injury which may result from im proper use of the vehic le. You m ust alway s comply w ith the sp ecific laws of the c ountry that y ou are travelling through. These laws ma y differ from the inform ation in this Ow ners Manual.
When this Manual refers to a workshop visit, we recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide first-class serv ice at reasona ble prices. You will rec eive quick, reliable and indiv idua l service. Exp erienced mechanics, trained by Vauxhall, work according to specific Vauxhall instructions. The O wners Ma nual should alwa ys be kept in the vehic le: R eady to hand in the g lov e compartment.
This symbol signifies:
6 continue reading on next page. 3 The asterisk signifies equipment not fitted to all v ehicles (model variants, engine op tions, models specific to one country, optional equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Acc essories).
9 Warn ing
Text marked 9 Warning provides information on risk of accident or injury. Disregard of the instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Inform your passeng ers accordingly. Y ellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or indicate some action to be performed. Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second action to be performed. Direc tional da ta, e.g. left or right, or front or back, in the descriptions alway s relate to the direction of travel. We wish y ou many hours of p leasurab le driving
Make use of the Owners Manual:
z The "In Brief" section will give you an initial overv iew. z The table of c ontents at the beginning of the ow ners manual and within the individual chapters will show y ou where every thing is. z Its index will help you find what you want. z It w ill fa miliarize y ou with the sophisticated technology. z It w ill increase y our pleasure in your vehicle. z It w ill help you to handle your vehic le expertly . The O wners Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood.
Your V auxhall Team
Contents
Commitment to customer satisfaction:
Our ai m: to k eep you happy with your vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers offer first-class serv ice a t competitiv e prices. Experienced, factory-trained technicians w ork according to factory instructions. Y our Authorised Repa irer can supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALLAPPRO VED PARTS , which hav e und ergone stringent quality and precision chec ks, and of course useful and a ttrac tiv e VAUXHALL-APPROVED AC CESSO RIES. Our nam e i s your guara ntee! For d eta ils of the Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork, please r ing this number; 0845 090 2044
In Brief .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 2 Locks, Doors, Windows .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 30 S eats, Interior ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 49 Instrum ents, Controls ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 82 Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 105 Infotainment S ystem . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 112 C lim ate C ontrol . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 114 Driving and Operation ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 131 S elf-help, Vehicle C are ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 170 S ervice, Maintenance ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 198 Technical Data .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 210 Index . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 230
In Brief
In Brief
To unlock and open the vehicle: Press button q , pull door handle
6 Door locks p age 30, Keys pag e 30, Elec tronic imm obiliser pa ge 30, Radio frequency rem ote control page 32, Central lock ing sy stem p age 37, Anti-theft locking system 3 page 38, Vauxhall a la rm system 3 p age 42.
Unlock vehicle and open with the Open&Start system 3: Electronic key in vehicle reception range, Pull handle
6 Open&S tart system 3 pa ge 33.
In Brief
Unlock luggage compartment and open: Press button q on the remote control, or for the Open&Start system 3 place electronic key in the vehicle reception range, operate button beneath handle
6 Open&S tart sy stem 3 pag e 33, Radio frequency remote control pag e 32, Central locking system page 37, Vauxhall alarm system 3 page 42.
To adjust front seat: Pull handle, slide seat, release handle

6 Seats pa ge 49, Sea t position p age 50.
Adjust front seat backrests: Turn handwheel

Move seat bac krest to suit sea ting position. Do not lea n on seat when a djusting. 6 Seats page 49, S eat position page 50, Folding down the front passengers seat pag e 57.
9 Warning
Imp ortant: Do not sit nea rer than 10 inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to perm it safe airba g deploy ment.
In Brief
Adjusting front seat height 3: Operate levers on outboard side of seats

Lever pumping m otion up: Seat higher down: Seat lower 6 Seats page 49, Seat position page 50.
To adjust front seat inclination 3 : Pull inner lever on front of seat, adjust inclination, release lever, engage seat in position
Ad just inclination b y shifting body weig ht. 6 Seats pa ge 49, Sea t position p age 50.
Adjusting height of head restraints of front seat and outboard seats in second row: Press knob to release, adjust height, engage
6 Head restraints page 51, Adjust rear centre head restraint and third seat row head restraints p age 51, Head restraint position page 51, Removing the head restraint page 52.
In Brief
Putting on seat belt: Pull out the seat belt smoothly, pass it over your shoulder and click into the belt buckle
The seat belt must not be twisted a t any point. The la p belt must lie snugly against the body. The front sea t back rests must not be tilted b ack too far (recom mended max imum tilting angle approx. 25). To release belt, press red button on belt buckle. 6 Three-point seat belt page 63, Airbag system pa ge 69, Seat position page 50.
Adjusting interior mirror: Swivel mirror housing

Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing to reduce dazzle at night. 6 Mirrors page 46, automatically dipping interior mirror p age 46.
Electrical exterior mirrors 3, adjust: Four-way switch in drivers door

Push right or left mirror switch: four-way switch adjusts relevant m irror. 6 Mirrors page 45, Aspherical exterior m irror page 45, Fold ex terior mirror p age 45, Heated ex terior mirrors pages13, 116.
In Brief
In Brief
1 2 3 4 Page Side air v ents ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 115 Front pa ssengers airbag . .... ..... .... . 69 Centre air v ents .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 115 Left hea ted sea t 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... ... 116 Tyre deflation monitoring sy stem 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... 154 Tyre pressure monitoring sy stem 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... 155 Parking distance sensors 3 .. ..... ... 152 Haza rd warning lights .. .... .... .... 11 107 Central locking ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 39 SPO RT mode 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 150 Right hea ted sea t 3 . ..... .... .... ..... ... 116 Central information display for time, date, outside temperature, Infotainm ent system 3, check control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 101 Trip computer 3 ... .... ..... .... .... ..... 93, 98 Electronic Climate Control 3 ..... ... 125 Turn signal, headlight flash, dipped beam, main beam ... ... 10, 105 Door-to-door lighting 3 .... .... ..... .... 108 Parking light .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 109 Cruise control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 151 8 9 10 7 Pa ge Remote control on steering wheel 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 112 Instruments . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 82 Horn ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 11 Driv ers airbag .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 69 Windscreen wiper, wind screen wash system, headlight wash system 3 and rear window w ash sy stem ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 11, 12, 102 Pa rk ing lights, dipped beam ... ..... 105 Instrument illumination ... ..... .... ..... 109 Fog tail lig ht .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 107 Front fog lights 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 106 Head lig ht range adjustment 3 .... 107 Bonnet release lev er .... .... ..... .... .... 170 Starter switch with immobiliser .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 9 and Sensor panel for emerg ency op eration Op en&Start system 3 ... . 17
Page 14 Accelerator pedal .... .... ..... .... . 141, 143 15 Brake pedal .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 141, 157 16 C lutch pedal 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 141 17 S teering w heel a djustment . ..... .... .... . 9 18 S ta rt/Stop button 3 .... ..... .... ..... 17, 33 19 Ashtray s 3 .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 79 20 S elec tor lever, manual transmission ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 14 Easy tronic 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 14 Automatic transmission 3 .. ..... 14, 15 21 C limate control . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 114 22 Infotainment system 3 ..... .... ..... .... 112 23 Glove compartment ... ..... .... ... 80, 117
11
12 13
In Brief
Control indicators O pen&S tart system 3, 0

fault , see pages 35, 83.
IDS+
I R v v X Q p W A
Eng ine oi l pressure, see page 83. Brak e system , clut ch system 3, see pages 84, 158, 205. Airb ag systems, belt t ensioners, see pages 64, 73, 84. Elec tronic St abili ty Progra mme (ESP P lu s) 3, see pages 84, 148. Seat bel t 3, see pages 63, 84. Door open, see page 84. Alternat or, see page 84. Coola nt temperat ure, see pages 84, 204. Eng ine electr oni cs, tra nsm ission electronic s 3, im mobili ser, diesel fuel filter 3, fault , see pages 30, 85, 135, 140, 147. Easytronic 3, start eng ine, see pages 85, 131.
Interacti ve Dynam ic Driv ing System 3 , C ontinuous Dam ping Control (CDC ) 3, SPOR T mode 3, see p ages 85, 150. Engine oil l ev el 3, see p ages 85, 202. Exterior light s, see p ages 85, 105. Pa rking distance sensors 3, see p ages 85, 152. Turn sig nal lig ht s, see p ages 10, 85, 106. Fuel level, see p ages 86, 88, 144. Front fog lights 3 , see p ages 86, 106. Main beam , see p ages 10, 86, 105. Fog t ail li ght, see p ages 86, 107. Wi nt er program me of automa tic tra nsm issi on 3 or Easytronic 3 , see p ages 86, 133, 139. SPORT m ode of automa tic transmission 3 or Easyt ronic 3, see p ages 86, 133, 138.
y Z u ! w
Seat occupancy recogniti on 3, see pages 74, 86. Exhaust emi ssion 3 , see pages 86, 147. Anti -lock Bra ke Syst em (A BS ), see pages 86, 159. Prehea ting system 3, Diesel parti cle filter 3, see page 86. Deflati on Detecti on System 3, Tyre Pressur e Moni toring System 3, see pages 87, 154, 155. Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3, fault , see pages 87, 108. C ruise cont rol 3, see pages 87, 151.
S 8 r O Y > C r T
In Brief
Steering column lock and ignition: Turn key to position 1. To release lock, rotate steering wheel a little
Positions: 0 = Ignition off, 1 = Steering released, ig nition off 2 = Ignition on, Diesel engines: preheating 3 = Starting 6 Start p age 16, Electronic immobiliser page 30, Parking the vehicle pa ge 18.
Steering column lock and ignition on vehicles with Open&Start system 3: Ensure electronic key is in the vehicle interior reception area and press the Start/Stop button Release steering column lock by moving steering wheel slightly
To start the vehicle, also operate brake or clutch p edal. To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition off by pressing the Start/S top button, open drivers door and engage steering w heel. Do not a llow vehicle to move whilst doing this. 6 Start page 17, Elec tronic imm obiliser pa ge 30, Pa rk ing the vehicle page 18.
Steering wheel adjustment: Swivel lever down, adjust height and distance, swivel lever up, engage
Do not a djust steering wheel unless vehicle is sta tionary and steering c olumn lock has been released . 6 Airb ag system page 69.
10
In Brief
Turn light switch: 7 = Off 8 = Parking lights 9 = Dipped beam or main beam AUTO = Automatic dipped beam activation 3 Press button: > = Front fog lights 3 r = Fog tail light
6 Lighting p age 105, Headlight control indicator page18.
Headlight flash, main beam and dipped beam: Headlight = Pull stalk flash towards steering wheel Main beam = Stalk forwards Dipped beam = Stalk forwards again or to the steering wheel
6 Dipped beam, headlight flash page 105.
Switch on turn signals: To the right = Stalk up To the left = Stalk down
6 Turn signals pag e 106.
In Brief
11
Hazard warning lights: On = Press Off = Press again

6 Hazard w arning lights p age 107.
Activate horn: j Press in centre of steering wheel

6 Airbag system pa ge 69, Remote control on the steering wheel 3 page 112.
Windscreen wiper: Move stalk up gently = Off $ = timed interval wipe % = Slow & = Fast
Press stalk down from position : S ingle swipe. 6 Windscreen wiper pag e 102, Adjusta ble wip e interv al 3 page 103, Further information pages 197, 206.
12
In Brief
Automatic wiping with rain sensor 3 : Move stalk up gently $ = Automatic wiping with rain sensor = Off
6 Windscreen wiper page 102, Further information pages 197, 206.
Operating windscreen and headlight wash systems 3: Pull stalk towards steering wheel
6 Windscreen wa sh system and headlight wash system p age103, Further inform ation pages 197, 207.
Activate rear window wiper and wash system: Wiper on = Stalk forwards Wiper off = Stalk forwards again Washing = Push the stalk forwards and then hold
6 Rear window wiper and wash sy stem pag e 104, Further information p ages 197, 206.
In Brief
13
Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors: On = Press Off = Press again
6 Climate control page 114, heated rear window page 116.
Clearing fogged or icy windows: Air distribution on l , Rotary knob for temperature and air volume to the right; Air conditioning system 3: Button n must also be pushed; Automatic air conditioning system 3: Press buttons n and V , Move rotary knob for temperature to the right, air quantity to A; Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3: Press button V
6 Electronic Climate C ontrol (EC C) 3 page 114.
Set automatic mode of Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3: Press AUTO button, select temperature with rotary knob, open air vents
6 Electronic C limate Control (ECC ) 3 see page 125.
14
In Brief
Manual transmission:
Reverse: with the vehicle stationary, w ait 3 seconds after declutching and then pull up the button on the selector lever a nd enga ge the gea r. If the gear does not engag e, set the lever in neutral, release the clutch pedal and depress again; then repeat gear selection.
Easytronic 3: N = Idling o = Driving position + = Higher gear = Lower gear A/M = Switch between Automatic and Manual mode R = Reverse gear (with selector lever lock)
The selector lever must alway s be mov ed in the appropriate direction as far as it will go. Upon release, it autom atically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/mode ind icator in the transm ission display . The footb rake must b e depressed when starting. 6 Ea sy tronic 3 pag e 131.
Automatic transmission 3: P = Park position R = Reverse gear N = Neutral (idling) D = Automatic gear selection 3 = 1st to 3rd gear 2 = 1st and 2nd gear 1 = 1st gear
P or N must be engaged when starting. To leav e P or N, switch on ignition, d epress footbrake and press button on selector lever.
In Brief
Press button on selector lever to eng age P or R. P R only when the vehicle is stationary, apply handb ra ke first only when the vehicle is stationary
15
Press button on selector lev er to engage P or R. P R only when the vehicle is sta tionary, apply hand brake first only when the vehicle is sta tionary
6 Automatic transmission 3 page 136.
6 Automatic tra nsmission 3 pag e 136.
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 3: P = Park position R = Reverse gear N = Neutral (idling) D = Automatic gear selection Selector lever in D to the left: Manual mode + = Higher gear = Lower gear
P or N must be engag ed w hen starting. To leave P or N, switch on ignition, depress footbrake and p ress b utton on selector lever.
16
In Brief
To switch on the ignition, only turn the key to 2. 6 Electronic im mobiliser pa ge 30, Diesel fuel system page 203.
Before starting-off, check:

z Ty re pressure and tyre cond ition see pa ges 159, 220. z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine com partment see pages 202 to 207. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting and num ber p la tes are free from dirt, snow and ice and are operational. z No ob jects are placed in front of the rear wind ow, on the instrument panel or in the area in which the airbag s inflate. z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are correctly ad justed. z Bra ke op eration.
Start engine: Operate clutch and brake, automatic transmission 3 to P or N, Easytronic 3: operate brake, do not accelerate, Petrol engine: turn key to 3; Diesel engine: turn key to 2, when control indicator ! goes off1) , turn key to 3; Release key when engine is running
Before restarting or switching off the engine, turn key back to 0.
1)
Prehea ting system only switches o n at low ou tsid e temp era tures.
In Brief
To switch on the ignition, d o not p ress the brake or clutc h pedal and only press the button briefly . Do not start unless vehicle is stationary. 6 O pen&Start system 3 page 33, Elec tronic imm obiliser pa ge 30, Diesel fuel system p age 203.
17
Start engine, Open&Start system 3 : Electronic key must be within reception range of the interior, Operate clutch or brake, Automatic transmission 3 in P or N, Easytronic 3: Operate brake, do not accelerate, Petrol engine: Press button; Diesel engine: Briefly press button, when control indicator ! goes off1) , press button again for 1 second; release button when engine is running
Press button ag ain to repeat the starting proced ure or switch off the engine.
1)
Release handbrake: Raise handle slightly, press release button, lower handle all the way
6 Handbrake page 158.
Preh ea ting system on ly sw itch es on a t low outsid e tem peratures.
18
In Brief
To activate the Vauxhall alarm system 3, press button p or with O pen&Start sy stem 3, touch sensor in one of the front door ha ndles. To activate the a nti-theft lock ing sy stem 3 , press button p twice. 6 For more information pa ge 30, Open&S tart sy stem page 33, Radio rem ote control pag e 32, Central lock ing page 37, Vauxhall a la rm system 3 p age 42, Vehicle decommissioning page 209.
Advice when parking:
z Do not park the vehicle on an ea sily ignitab le surfa ce. The high tem perature of the exhaust system could ignite the surface. z Alw ays apply the handbrake firmly. Apply the hand brake as firm ly as possible on uphill or downhill slop es. To reduce operating forces, depress foot b ra ke at the same time. z Close window. z Before switching off ignition: with manual transmission, engage first or reverse gear; with automatic tra nsmission 3 , selec tor lever in P; with Easytronic 3 engage first or reverse gear (note gear indicator see pages 131, 136).
Parking the vehicle: apply handbrake firmly, switch ignition off, lock steering wheel, lock vehicle
To lock, press button p on the remote control or in the case of the O pen&Start system 3, touch the sensor in one of the front door handles. With Open&S tart sy stem 3 , the d riv ers door must be opened to lock the steering wheel.
In Brief
z In vehicles with automa tic transmission 3 the key can only be removed with the selector lever in position P. With the O pen&Start system 3 " P" flashes in the transm ission display for severa l seconds if P ha s not been selected or the handbrake has not been applied . z On vehicles with Ea sytronic 3 control indica tor R flashes for a few seconds after the ig nition is switched off if the handb ra ke has not been app lied see pa ge 84. z With the Open&S tart sy stem 3 the engine ca n only be switched off when the vehic le is sta tionary. z Turn steering wheel until lock is felt to engage (anti-theft protection), removing ignition key beforehand. With O pen&Start system 3 switch off ig nition and open driver s door. z The engine cooling fa ns ma y run after the engine has been sw itched off see pa ge 201. 6 Further inform ation see pa ges 207, 209.
19
That was the most important information in brief for your first drive in your vehicle.
The other pages of this chapter contain a summary of the noteworthy functions of your vehicle.
The remaining chapters of the Owners Manual contain important information on operation, safety and maintenance as well as a complete index.
20
In Brief
Seats in second row 9 Warning

When the row of seats or the backrests are being adjusted, keep hands away from the hinge a rea - risk of injury.
Adjust backres ts of outboard s eats
Push down release lever on outboard side of backrest, b ackrest angle can be adjusted in two places tow ards the rea r. Release handle and latch back rest into position. The backrest engages in sev eral positions. The seat m ust not be occupied whilst the vehicle is m oving if the seat is in the vertica l position or tilted forwards. The outboard seat b ackrests can be tilted forwards until they are fla t in order to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle. Push relea se lev er down and tilt backrest forward. To move the back rest upright or chang e the position, push release lever down and adjust ba ckrest. Release ha nd le and engage back rest.
Seats in third row 9 Warning

When the seats are being moved upright or folded in, keep hands away from hinge area - risk of injury.
Moving seats
Push release handle on right or left hand side of sea t bench forwards a nd mov e seat row forwards or backw ards. Release handle and allow seat row to loc k into position.
Move se ats upright out of vehicle floor

Remove floor c ov ering 3. Removing luggag e c om partment cover 3 see page 57. Before moving the seats upright, slide seat bench of second row of seats forwards by pushing forward the lever a t the right or left-hand side of the seat b ench. The tip of the arrow at the seat bench m ust be in front of the square m ark. S lide front seats forwards a little if necessary.
In Brief
21
The sea t belts must be routed through the belt holder a s shown in the illustration. The latch plates must be inserted in the holder.
9 Warning
In the version with Flex Organizer 3 see page 60, the belts must be suspended in the right and left seat belt ey es on the floor of the vehicle without twisting see illustra tion ab ov e a nd page 67, Fig. 17420 T. All com ponents must be removed from the rails 3 in the lugg age compartment.
From lug gage compartm ent, use one hand to lift seat by the handle, sw iv el ba ck and move upright until it a ud ib ly engag es. Use other ha nd to support top of backrest, see Fig. 17372 T.
Lift up cover in floor between the seats and swivel b elt buckles upwards see pag e 22, Fig. 17374 T. Remove latch plate and seat b elt from seat belt hold er.
9 Warning
The belt must not b e routed through the belt holder when the seat belt is being worn. Move seat bench in sec ond row of seats to required position a nd engage by pushing lever on right or left-hand side of seat bench forwa rd s see page 20, Fig. 17367 T. Fit luggage compartment cover 3 by fitting behind the third row of seats see page 57.
22
In Brief
Fold se ats into floor of vehicle
Removing luggage com partment c ov er 3 see page 57. Before folding in the seat, slide seat bench in second row of seats forwards by pushing forward lever on right or left-hand side of seat b ench see pa ge 20, Fig. 17369 T. The tip of the arrow on the seat bench m ust be in front of the sq uare mark . Slide front seats forwards a little if necessary. Push down head restraints of seats in third row releasing spring catches by pressing. Guide seat belts through belt holder as shown in illustration and insert latch p lates into holder.
From lugga ge com partment, press button at top of seat backrest and swiv el backrest forward. Raise seat by handle at rear and swiv el bac krest further forwa rd s until seat is lowered into v ehicle floor. Hold seat by handle during the entire swiv elling proced ure.
Push b elt buckles into recess in floor a nd close c ov er. Move seat bench in sec ond row of seats to required position a nd engage by pushing lever on right or left-hand side of seat bench forwa rd s see page 20, Fig. 17367 T. Fit luggage compartment cover 3 behind second row of seats see page 57. Insert floor cover 3. The components of the rails 3 and the Flex Organizer 3 see page 60, m ust only be used with the seats in the third row of seats folded in and the seat belts unhooked see page 67, Fig. 17420 T. Attach released belt hooks to magnets of brack et see page 67, Fig. 17399 T.
In Brief
23
Airbag system
The airbag sy stem consists of a number of individual systems.
Side airbag system 3
Front airbag system
The front airbag system is trig gered in the event of a serious a ccident involving a frontal im pact and forms safety c ushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movem ent of the d riv er and front passenger is check ed a nd the risk of injuries to the upper body a nd head thereby substantially reduced.
The sid e airbag is triggered in the event of a side-on c ollision to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passenger in the respective door area. This substantially reduces the risk of injury to the upp er body and pelv is.
Curtain airbag sys te m 3
The curtain a irba g system triggers in case of a side-on collision and provid es a safety barrier in the hea d area on the respective side of the vehic le. This reduces the risk of injury to the hea d considerab ly in case of a side-on collision. 6 Airb ag system page 69.
24
In Brief
Active head restraints 3 on front seats

In the event of a rear-end impa ct, the active head restraints tilt forwards slightly. The head is more effectiv ely supported by the head restraint and the risk of injuries caused by whiplash in the neck area is red uced. Active head restraints are id entified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide sleev es. 6 Head restra ints page 51.
Operating menus in the information display 3

Menu options are selected via menus and using the arrow buttons or the multi-function knob of the Infotainment sy stem 3 or the buttons 3 on the steering wheel. The respective menu options are shown on the d isplay . Selection using the arrow buttons 3: Press the arrow buttons to the left or right.
S elec tion using multi-function knob 3: rotate and press multi-function knob. To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion knob left or right to Return or Mai n and select.
In Brief
25
Board Computer
BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres
19,5 19:36 All values
1 8
257.0 40 7.0 31.0
miles mph gals mpg
Coolant level
ch eck
OK
Selection with left adjuster wheel on steering wheel 3: turn adjuster wheel and press. 6 Information display page 89
Trip computer 3
The trip computers provide information on driving data, which is continually recorded and ev alua ted electronically. Functions: z Range z Instanta neous consum ption z Distanc e z Average speed z Effective consumption z Average consumption z Stop watch z Tyre pressure 3 6 Trip comp uter 3 pages 93, 98.
Check control 3
The check control softwa re monitors z Fluid levels z Tyre pressure 3 z Remote control battery z Vauxhall alarm system 3 z Important ex terior lighting , including cables and fuses. 6 Check control 3 page 101.
26
In Brief
Remote control on steering wheel 3

The functions of the Infotainm ent system 3 and the information display can be opera ted with the remote control on the steering wheel. Further information is available in the I nfotainment system operating instructions. 6 Remote control on steering wheel 3 page 112, Infotainm ent system page 113.
Twin Audio 3
Tw in Audio p rov id es rear seat occupants with the opportunity to listen to a different audio source tha n the one selected by the driver on the Infotainment sy stem. Only a n audio source tha t is not currently active on the radio system can be controlled using Twin Audio. Tw o headp hone connections are a vailable, with separate volum e c ontrols. Further inform ation is av ailable in the Infotainment sy stem opera ting instructions. 6 Twin Audio 3 page 112.
Open&Start system with electronic key and radio remote control 3

The Open&S tart sy stem allows the vehicle to be locked and unlocked, including mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 and the Vauxhall a la rm system 3 without a mechanical key and the engine to be started and stopped using a S ta rt/Stop button. All the d riv er has to do is carry the electronic key around with him. 6 Open&S tart system 3 pa ge 33.
In Brief
27
Parking distance sensors 3

When rev erse gear is selected, the pa rk ing distance sensors switch on automatically. The p arking dista nce sensors ca n also be enab led m anually at a speed of less than 15 mph (25 k m/h) using the r button on the instrum ent panel. If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle at the front or the rear, a series of acoustic signa ls is hea rd in the v ehicle interior. The interv al between the signals becomes shorter as the obstacle becomes closer. The signal is continuous if the distance is less than 30 cm . 6 Park ing distance sensors 3 page 152.
Sport mode 3
To activate
Press S PO RT button. SPORT mode is used to cha ng e damping 3 , steering 3, throttle application and the shift point for Easytronic 3 and autom atic tra nsmission 3 whilst driving. Damping and steering become more direct and provide better contact with the road surface. The engine reacts more quickly to accelerator movements. With Easy tronic 3 and automatic tra nsmission 3, the shift tim es are shortened and shifting tak es place at higher revs (not with cruise control enabled 3). 6 Sp ort m ode 3 p age 150.
FlexOrganizer 3
The side walls contain retaining strips, where va rious components can be attached to divide the lugg age compa rtm ent or fasten loads. The sy stem consists of z adapters z variable partition net z mesh pockets for the sid e wa lls z hooks in the lug gage compartment 6 FlexO rg aniz er 3 pag e 60.
28
In Brief
Board Computer
Tyre pressure loss monitoring system (DDS = Deflation Detection System) 3

The Deflation Detection S ystem continuously monitors the speed of all wheels whilst driving. If a ty re loses pressure, it becom es sm aller and therefore rotates m ore quic kly than the other wheels. If the system detects a difference in speed, the c ontrol indicator w illuminates in red.
After a tyre pressure correc tion or after a tyre or w heel cha nge, the system m ust be initialised by pressing the DDS button. 6 Tyre p ressure loss monitoring sy stem 3 page 154.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3

The Ty re Pressure Monitoring System continually checks the pressure and speed of all four wheels whilst driving. A pressure sensor is insta lled in ea ch wheel. The inflation pressures of the individual wheels are tra nsmitted to a controller, where they are compared. The current tyre pressures ca n be displayed on the Gra phic al Inform ation Display or the Colour Inform ation Display 3. Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in the form of messages on the information display whilst driving. 6 Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3 pag e 155.
In Brief
Motorway lighting
29
At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped bea m automatically raises slightly, thereby increa sing hea dlight rang e. Adaptiv e Forward Lighting 3 page 108.
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3

AFL im prov es lighting in curv es (curve lighting ) on vehicles with Bi-Xenon head lig ht system .
Curve lighting
The Xenon light bea m pivots based on steering wheel position a nd speed (from a pprox. 6 m ph (10 km /h)).
30
Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows
Locks, Doors, Windows
Replacement keys
The key number is specified in the vehic le docum ents and in the C ar Pass 3. The key is a c onstituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem free op eration of the electronic immobiliser. When electronic k eys of the Open&S tart sy stem are being replaced , all keys must be ha nded to the dea ler for programming. Keep the sp are k ey in a safe plac e. Locks see page 197, Open&S tart sy stem, elec tronic keys see p age 33.
Key with foldaway key section 3
Replacem ent keys ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Loc k cylinders . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca r Pass... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Key with foldaw ay key section 3 . ..... . Electronic immobiliser... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Store personal vehicle settings in the vehicle key 3 ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Radio frequency remote control 3 with mec hanical key .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . O pen&Start system 3 ... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Central locking system . .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fault when locking or unlocking... ..... . Lug gage compartment .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vauxhall alarm system 3. ..... .... .... ..... . Child safety locks . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ex terior mirrors..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Interior mirror .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electric windows 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sunblind on panoramic roof 3 . .... ..... .
30 30 30 30 30 31 32 33 37 40 41 42 45 45 46 46 48
Loc k cylinders
Designed to free-wheel if they are forcefully rotated without the correct k ey or if the correct key is not fully inserted. To reset, turn cy linder with the c orrect key until its slot is vertica l, remove key and then re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels, turn the key through 180 and rep eat op eration.
Press button to extend. Press button to retrac t and key sec tion engages audibly .
Electronic immobiliser
Car Pass
The Ca r Pass contains a ll of the vehicles data and should therefore not be k ept in the vehicle. Have your Ca r Pa ss to hand when consulting a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer.
Locks, D oors, Windo ws

The system check s w hether the vehicle is allowed to be started with the mechanical key or electronic key of the Open&Start system 3 that is being used. If the key is recognised a s "a uthorised" the vehicle can be started. The checking tak es place via a transponder in the k ey.
31
Control indicator for immobiliser A
Note
The immobiliser does not lock the doors. Therefore, after leaving the v ehicle a lways lock it and switch on the Vaux hall alarm system 3 see p ages 38, 42.
Store personal vehicle settings in the vehicle key 3

The last settings selected z for the Electronic Climate Control (ECC ) 3 z information display 3 z Infotainment sy stem 3 z instrument illumination Control indica tor A illuminates briefly when the ig nition is sw itched on. If the control indicator flashes w hen the ignition is on, there is a fault in the sy stem; the engine cannot be started. S witc h off the ignition and then rep eat the start attempt. If the control indicator A continues flashing, attempt to sta rt the engine using the spare key a nd seek the assistanc e of a work shop. If control indicator A illuminates after the engine is started, there is a fault in the engine electronics or transmission electronics 3 (see pages 135, 140, 147) or there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3 see page 203. are stored automatically depending on the vehicle k ey used. Different settings are stored for ea ch vehicle k ey. Use of a vehicle key will activa te the settings associated with it. Each tim e the vehicle is locked , the settings are saved again.
The electronic imm ob iliser activates itself automatically after the key has been rem ov ed from the ignition or, with the O pen&Start system 3, w hen the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button. The c od e number of the electronic immobiliser is giv en in the C ar Pass.
32

Fault
If the central locking system cannot be operated w ith the rem ote control, it may be due to the following : z The range of the remote control has been ex ceeded . z Remote control battery voltage is too low . Battery rep la cement see next page. z Frequent, repeated operation of the remote control outside the reception rang e of the vehicle (e. g. too far from vehicle, rem ote control is then no longer recognised). Remote control sy nchronisation see next pa ge. z Overloading the c entral locking by operating at frequent intervals, the power supply is interrupted for a short time. z Interferenc e from higher-power radio waves from other sources. To rectify the ca use of the fault, we recommend that y ou seek the assistanc e of a work shop. O pen d riv ers door with key see page 40.
Radio frequency remote control 3 with mechanical key
Dep ending on the equipment level of your vehic le, one of the remote controls shown on this p age will be used . Radio frequency remote control in version with O pen&Start system 3 see page 34. The rem ote control is integ ra ted in the key . Used to op erate: z Central locking system , z Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3, z Vauxhall ala rm system 3 . The w indows of vehicles with electric windows in all doors 3 can also be opened or closed using the remote c ontrol see page 46.
The remote control has a ra nge of approx. 5 metres. This range can be affected by outside influences. Aim the remote control at the v ehicle to op erate. Handle the rem ote control with care, protect it from m oisture and high temperatures and avoid unnecessary op eration. Function check by illumination of haz ard warning lig hts.
Central locking system, mechanical anti-the ft locking system 3

see p age 37. see p age 42.
Vauxhall alarm system 3 Electric windows 3

see p age 46.

Remote control battery re placem ent In the event of a malfunction or when the battery has been replaced, synchronis e the rem ote control
33
After rep lacing the battery, unlock the door with the k ey in the lock. The remote control will be sy nchronised when you sw itc h on the ignition.
Open&Start system 3
Replace the battery as soon a s the range of the remote control begins to shrink . Key wit h foldawa y k ey sec tion Ex tend k ey see page 30. Op en remote control. Rep la ce b attery - battery type see pa ge 223 noting installation position. Close remote control. Make sure that y ou dispose of old b atteries in accordance with environmenta l protection regulations. Key wit h fixed k ey sec tion Hav e the battery replaced by a workshop. The O pen&Start system allows the vehic le to be lock ed and unlocked, including the mechanical a nti-theft locking system 3 and the Vaux hall alarm system 3 , and the engine to b e started and stop ped without a m echanical key . All the driver has to do is keep the key to hand. The windows of vehicles with electric wind ow s in all doors 3 c an also be opened or closed from outside using the rem ote control of the elec tronic key see page 40.
The electronic k ey must b e within the external reception range about 1 metre from the vehicle in order to lock a nd unlock the vehicle. If the electronic key is recognized as "a uthorised" the vehicle can b e unlocked by pulling a door handle or by operating the button beneath the tailgate handle and the doors and the tailgate can b e opened.
34

The engine and the ignition are switc hed off by p ressing the Sta rt/Stop button a gain. The vehic le must be sta tionary. The immobiliser is activated at the sa me tim e. If the ignition has been switched off and the vehicle is stationary , the steering colum n lock activates autom atic ally when the drivers door is opened or closed. The electronic key must be within the reception range of the interior to turn the ignition on or off. We recommend tha t the driver carries the elec tronic key with him. If the electronic key is not recognised, select another key position. Do not p ut the electronic key in the lugg age compartment or in front of the information display. doors. The electronic key m ust be within the external reception rang e of app rox imately one metre from the vehicle. The Op en&Start system 3 does not the lock the vehicle automatically if the electronic key is outside the ex ternal reception range of approx im ately one metre from the vehicle.
Radio frequency re mote control
When the S tart/Stop button is pressed, the system re-checks the authorisation. The electronic key has to be recognised in the interior in order to do this. After the key has been authorised the ignition switches on. At the same time, the electronic immobiliser is switched off and the electromechanic al steering column lock is deactivated . Pressing the S tart/S top button again with the brake or clutch ped al depressed or in P or N with automatic transm ission 3 starts the engine. Press button for a t least one second with the vehic le stationa ry or hold down until the engine sta rts. If the brake or clutch peda l is depressed , the engine ca n be started right away with a single press on the Start/Stop button. Releasing the S tart/Stop b utton interrupts the starting proced ure.
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked by conventional means using the remote control with the buttons on the electronic key. In ad dition, the mechanical anti-theft locking system and Vauxhall a larm sy stem can b e arm ed a nd disa bled using the remote control. The wind ow s of v ehicles with electric windows in all doors 3 c an also be opened or closed from outside using the rem ote control.
The vehic le is locked from the outsid e with the doors closed by touching the sensor panel in the door ha ndle of one of the front

The remote control has a range of approx. 5 metres. This ra nge can b e affected b y outside influences. Aim the rem ote control at the vehicle to opera te. Handle the remote control with care, protect it from moisture and high tem peratures and avoid unnecessary opera tion. Function check by illumination of hazard warning lights.
35
Control indicator for Ope n&Start system 0
If the control indicator 0 is perma nently on, an error has occ urred in the system . Lock or unlock vehicle using the remote control or the emergency k ey if necessary see page 37, or try using the spare key . If 0 illumina tes, this can also mean that the steering column lock is still locked: mov e steering w heel to and fro a little and press Sta rt/Stop button again. If this 0 c om es on when the vehicle is in motion, there is a system error. Seek the assistance of a workshop immediately.
Central locking system, mechanical anti-the ft locking system 3

see page 37. see page 42.
Eme rgency operation
Vauxhall alarm s yste m 3 Ele ctric windows 3

see page 46.
If the control indicator flashes 0 with the ignition switched on or with the engine running an opera ting error has occurred, e.g. the electronic key is no longer w ithin the rec eption range of the vehic le interior. During the next starting procedure the engine may not be a ble to be started. Press Start/S top key slightly long er to switch the ignition off. Flashing of the 0 can a lso b e an indication of com plete failure of the electronic key. In this case operation is only possible using the emergency facility see nex t colum n. InSP3 in the service display or an appropriate m essag e in the information 3 display indicates that the battery of the electronic k ey need s replacing see page 36.
If the Op en&Start system or the electronic key fails (control indica tor 0 flashes or is permanently on) the driver s d oor ca n be locked or unloc ked with the emergency key in the electronic k ey: press locking mechanism on underside and remove cap towards the front by applying g entle
36

Replacing battery in electronic key
pressure to the cap. Push emergency key towards the outsid e over the detent position and remove.
O nly the driv ers door can be locked and unlock ed using the emergency key . The entire vehicle is unlocked as describ ed on page 41. The Vauxhall alarm sy stem 3 may be triggered when the vehicle is unlocked. Switch ignition on to dea ctivate alarm and release the steering column lock: hold electronic key at m arked position on the steering column p anelling and press the Start/Stop button. Repeat proc edure if necessary.
Hold electronic key at the marked loc ation to start the engine, depress brake peda l or clutch p edal or in v ehicles with automatic tra nsmission 3 depress brak e pedal a nd select P or N, Then press Start/S top button again. Press S tart/Stop b utton for at least 2 seconds to switch the engine off. Lock all doors ex cep t d riv ers door as described on page 41. Lock driv ers door with emergency key . This option is intend ed for emerg encies only. Replace the battery in the electronic key as quickly as p ossible or hav e the sy stem rep aired. Seek the assistance of a workshop.
Replace battery immediately if the system is no long er operating properly, or the range of the remote control deteriorates. The need for a battery change is indicated by I nS P3 in the S ervice Display or in vehicles with check control 3 an app ropriate message appears on the display see page 101.

Fault in Ope n&Start system or remote control
37
Central locking system

To unlock:
If the central lock ing cannot be operated or the engine cannot be started, the cause may be one of the following : z Electronic key out of reception range, or out of range of remote control, z Remote c ontrol battery voltage is too low. Battery rep la cement see page 36, z Frequent, repeated op eration of the rem ote control outside the reception range (e.g. too far from vehic le, remote control is then no longer recognised), To rep la ce the battery , press the lock ing mechanism on the und erside of the electronic key and remove the cover towards the front by applying gentle pressure see page 35, Fig . 17037 T. Push off cover with emblem on the button side towards the outsid e. Replace battery, for battery type see page 223, pay a ttention to installation position. Engage caps. z O verloading the central locking by opera ting at frequent interv als, the power supply is interrup ted for a short time, z Interference from hig her-power rad io wav es from other sources. To rectify the cause of the fault, cha nge the position of the electronic key or remote control or rep lace the battery in the remote control. I f the fault persists, seek the assista nce of a w ork shop. Emergency operation see pa ge 35.
For doors, boot lid /tailgate and tank flap . Remot e cont rol wit h mechanical key
Press button q on remote control. To open the door, p ull the handle. Open the lugg age compartment by operating the button beneath the tailgate handle.
Radio fre quency re mote control synchronisation
The remote control synchronises itself automatically during every starting proced ure.
38

Rem ote control w ith mechanic al key The electronic k ey must b e outsid e of the vehicle. All doors and the luggage compa rtm ent are locked by touching the sensor in the door ha nd le of the drivers or front passeng ers door or Press button p of the electronic k ey s remote control.
O pen&S tart system wit h elect ronic key 3
Mechanical anti-the ft locking sys tem 3
9 Warn ing
Do not use the sy stem if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot b e unlocked from inside. Remot e cont rol wit h mechanical key
The electronic key m ust be outside of the vehic le. The vehicle is unlocked b y pulling a door handle or by operating the button beneath the ta ilga te handle. or Press button q of the elec tronic key s rem ote control.
Press button p on remote control. Open&Sta rt system w ith electronic k ey 3
To lock
Close doors, lugga ge com partment and tank flap.
All doors must be c losed . At the la test 15 seconds after locking, p ress b utton p of the remote control ag ain.

Loc k buttons on all d oors are positioned suc h that doors cannot be opened. If the ignition was on, the driver s door must be opened and closed once so tha t the v ehicle can be secured. O pen&S tart system wit h elect ronic key 3
39
Central locking button for locking and unlocking the doors from inside the vehicle
Note
z If the driv ers door is not closed properly , the central loc king sy stem will not lock. z To loc k the d oors from within (e.g . to prevent unw anted entry from outside), press central locking switch m in the centre console. z After unlocking with the key in the lock 3 and opening the driver s door, the entire vehicle is unlocked. z If the central lock ing system is loc ked, the doors ca n also be unlocked by p ulling the interior handle. This unlocks the central locking system . z Locked doors unlock themselv es autom atically when an accident of a certa in severity occurs (for outside assista nce), and the hazard warning lights come on. In the version with a mec hanical key , the k ey must also be in the ignition. z With the Open&Start system 3 the vehicle cannot be unlocked within 2 second s of locking. Within this tim e a door handle can be pulled or the button beneath the tailgate handle operated to check whether the vehicle is locked . z The O pen&Start system 3 does not lock the v ehicle automatically if the electronic key is outside the recep tion range of the vehicle (more than 1 metre away from the vehicle).
Press button m in the centre console: doors are locked or unlocked. All doors must be c losed . The electronic key must be outside of the vehicle. No more than 15 seconds after locking, touch the sensor in the handle of the driver s or front passengers door ag ain or press button p of the electronic key s rem ote control again. If the ignition was on, the driver s door must be opened and closed once so tha t the v ehicle can be secured. All doors are sec ured aga inst opening. The LED in the central locking b utton m illuminates for around 2 minutes after lock ing with the remote control. If the doors are loc ked from the insid e during driv ing using the central locking button, the LED m illum inates permanently . If the key is in the ignition 3, locking is only possible if all doors a re closed. When the mechanical anti-theft locking sy stem 3 is a ctiv e see page 38, the doors cannot b e unlocked with this b utton.
40

Rem ote control w ith mechanic al key Hold down button q of rem ote control to open. To close, hold d own button p or touch sensor in door handle for longer. The electronic key must be recognised within the ex ternal recep tion ra ng e. It is a dvisable for the d riv er to k eep the electronic key to hand. Further information on windows see page 46.
z A spa re key m ust not be present in the vehicle with the O pen&Start system 3 when the v ehicle is b eing locked. z The locking sensors in the door ha ndles must be kept clean for unrestricted functionality with the O pen&S ta rt system 3.
Operating the windows 3 from the outside
9 Warning
Ta ke c are when operating the electric wind ows. Risk of injury, particula rly to children. Vehicle passengers must be informed according ly . Keep a close watch on the windows w hen closing them . Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them a s they move. Dep ending on the v ehicle equipment 3, the w indows ca n be opened and closed from the outside in v ehicles with power windows in all doors. Hold button q or p on the rem ote control depressed until a ll windows hav e opened or completely closed. Open&Sta rt system w ith electronic k ey 3
Fault
z Overloading the c entral locking by operating at frequent intervals, the power supply is interrupted for a short time, z Defec tiv e fuse in fusebox see page 184. To rectify the ca use of the fault, seek the assistance of a workshop.
Fault when locking or unlocking

Fault in remote control or O pe n&Start system 3
41
To unlock Turn key or em ergenc y key with O pen&Start system 3 see page 35, forwards in d riv ers d oor lock a s far as it will go. Turn key back to a vertic al position and rem ov e. The entire vehicle is unlock ed when the drivers door is opened. The vehic le is unlock ed (not possible if antitheft locking system 3 enabled beforehand ). To deactivate the anti-theft locking system 3 switch ignition on. Em ergency operation of the Open&Start system 3 see pa ge 35. To lock O pen front passengers door, close d riv ers door, press centra l locking button m in centre console. Central locking system locks all doors. Close front passenger s door.
O pen&Start system wi th el ect ronic k ey 3 O perating the button b enea th the tailgate handle unlocks and op ens the luggage compa rtm ent together with the doors if the electronic key is recognized outside of the car, or Press button p of the electronic k ey s remote control, the luggage compartment will be unlocked together with the doors.
To open
Malfunction in ce ntral locking s yste m
To unlock Turn key or em ergenc y key with O pen&Start system 3 see page 35, forwards in d riv ers d oor lock a s far as it will go. Turn key back to a vertic al position and rem ov e. The other doors can b e opened b y pulling the handle inside the d oors (not possible if anti-theft locking system 3 enab led b eforehand). The lugg age compartment and fuel filler cap remain locked. To deactivate the anti-theft locking system 3 sw itch ignition on see page 44.
To lock With the Open&S tart sy stem 3 see page 35. To lock passengers door, insert key or em ergency key into opening a bove lock on inside of door and opera te lock b y pressing (audible) and close d oor. Procedure m ust be carried out for every door. Drivers door can be locked from the outside. The unlocked fuel filler ca p and the tailgate cannot be lock ed.
Emerge ncy ope ration of Open&Start system 3,

see p age 35.
The lugg age compartment is opened b y operating the button beneath the handle.
Luggage compartment
To unlock
Rem ote control w ith mechanic al key Press button q on the rem ote control, the lugg age compartment a nd doors a re unlocked.
9 Warn ing
Do not drive with the tailgate open or ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky objec ts, since toxic exhaust g as could penetra te the interior.
42

Rem ote control w ith mechanic al key
Fitting of a ccessories on the tailgate will increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy , the ta ilga te will then not stay open.
To activate
Remot e cont rol wit h mechanical key
To close
Press button p on remote control. Open&Sta rt system w ith electronic k ey 3 Press button p of the electronic key remote control or touch sensor in handle of one of the front doors. The electronic key must be recognised in the ex ternal reception area. It is advisable for the driver to keep the electronic k ey to ha nd. All doors, windows and the bonnet must b e closed. Press remote control button p to arm the anti-theft alarm sy stem and lock the vehicle. If the ig nition was sw itched on, the drivers door must be opened and closed once so that the anti-theft alarm system can be switched on.
Close lugg age com partment using handle on the inside of the tailgate. Do not operate the button beneath the handle when closing. Otherw ise the luggage compartment will once again be unlock ed.
Vauxhall alarm system 3

The system m onitors z the doors, luggag e com partment, bonnet, z the passenger compartm ent, z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised, z the ig nition.
To lock
Close doors, lugga ge com partment and tank flap.

43
Activation without monitoring of passenge r compartment and vehicle tilt
Light emitting diode (L ED)
All d oors, windows and the b onnet must be closed. The electronic key must be outside of the v ehicle. Touch the sensor in the handle of the drivers or front passenger s door or Press button p of the elec tronic key s rem ote control. If the ignition was switched on, the drivers door must be opened and closed once so that the a nti-theft ala rm system ca n be switched on.
During the first 10 sec onds of anti-theft alarm sy stem activa tion: Switch on when, for exam ple, anim als are to be left in the v ehicle. 1. C lose tailgate a nd bonnet. 2. Press button b in the roof console. The LED in button m flashes (m ax. 10 second s) see next c olumn 3. C lose doors. 4. Sw itch on a nti-theft ala rm system. LED illuminates. After app rox . 10 seconds the system is ac tiv ated, without m onitoring of the passenger com partment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes until sy stem is switched off. z LED illuminates. z LED flashes quickly = = Test, ignition dela y, Door, luggage compartment, bonnet open or system fault.
After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm sy stem activa tion: z LED flashes = slowly z LED comes on = for approx. 1 second Sy stem switched on, Switch off function.
If a system fault occ urs, seek the assistance of a w ork shop.
44

The vehic le is unlock ed by pulling a door ha ndle or by opera ting the button beneath the tailgate handle a nd the anti-theft alarm system is d eactivated when the electronic k ey is recognized as being outside of the vehic le. or Press button q of the electronic keys remote control. In the event of a fault in the remote control or the Op en&Start sy stem, open the vehicle as described on page 40. If the alarm is trigg ered when the driver s door is opened, dea ctiv ate the anti-theft alarm system by switching on the ignition. Ala rm siren w ith integrat ed batt ery 3 The alarm siren monitors the on-board voltage network and triggers an ala rm if this network is manipulated (e.g . if the vehicles ba ttery is disconnected by unauthorised persons). The alarm siren ha s its own power supply and is therefore not dependent on the vehicles battery. If the vehicles battery is to be disconnected (e.g. for maintenance w ork ), the alarm siren must be dea ctivated as follows: sw itch the ignition on then off, disconnect the vehicles battery within 15 seconds. To swit ch off alarm siren: S witc h ignition on then off.
To deactivate
Remote contr ol with m ec hanical k ey
Press button q on rem ote control or Switch on ignition. O pen&S tart system wit h elect ronic key 3
Note
Changes to the vehicle interior, such a s the use of seat covers, could impair the function of passenger comp artment monitoring.
Alarm
While the anti-theft alarm sy stem is switched on the alarm can be triggered, indica ted b y: z an acoustic sig nal (horn) and z a v isual signal (hazard w arning lights). The number and duration of the alarms are legally established. The alarm can be silenc ed b y pressing a button on the remote control or by switching on the ig nition. The anti-theft alarm system is d eactivated at the same tim e.
45
Child safety locks
Exterior mirrors
Swing in e xterior mirror
9 Warning
Use the child safety lock w henever children are oc cup ying the rear seats. Disreg ard may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle pa ssengers must be informed accordingly.
Ad just using the four-wa y switch in the drivers door. Press mirror switch to the rig ht or left. The four-way switch w ork s on the corresponding mirror. The mirror glass is m ov ed in the direc tion whic h corresp onds to the pressing of the four-way switch. Using key or screwdriver, turn rotary knob at rear door lock from the vertica l p osition: door cannot then be opened from insid e.
Manually: the exterior m irrors can be folded in by pressing gently on the outer edge of the housing. Electrically 3: Press n and b oth mirrors will swing in. Press button n again - both exterior mirrors swiv el to the starting position. If a sw iv elled-in electric mirror ha s b een swivelled out manually, pressing button n only swivels the other mirror out electrically. Pressing n again swivels both m irrors b ack in electrically. Fold mirrors out to driv ing position before mov ing away.
As pherical ex terior mirror 3
Increases the field of view. Estima ting the distance away of vehicles following y ou is only possible to a limited ex tent b ecause of slight distortion.
46

To adjust, swivel the mirror housing. To reduce d azzle from following v ehicles at night, swiv el lever on underside of mirror housing.
Electric windows 3
9 Warn ing
Take care when operating the electric windows 3. Risk of injury , esp ecially for child ren. Inform the passeng ers accordingly. If there are children on the rear seat, switch on the child safety system 3 for the electric windows. Keep a close wa tc h on the windows when closing them . Ensure that nothing becom es trapped in them as they m ov e.
Automatic anti-daz zle interior mirror 3
For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior mirrors will swing out of their normal mounting p osition if they are bumped with sufficient force. Reposition the m irror by apply ing slight pressure to the mirror housing.
The electric windows can be used z with ignition on, z within 5 m inutes of switching ignition off 3, Dazzle from following v ehicles at night is autom atic ally reduc ed. With the ignition off, the mirror does not dim. z within 5 minutes of switching ignition key to position 1. Function standby a fter switching off the ignition terminates when the drivers door is opened.
Interior mirror

For increm ental opera tion, briefly pull or press the switch. For a utomatic opening or closing, pull or press the sw itch longer. Pull or press the switch again to stop the movem ent. z Rearwa rd s (green field visible): Rear door switches operationa l
47
Ope rating w indows from outside 3
Safety function
If the window g lass enc ounters resistanc e above the midd le of the window during autom atic closing, it is im med ia tely stopped and the window opened ag ain. In the event of difficulty due to frost or the lik e, press the relevant window switch several tim es until the window is closed. O perated via two or four 3 switches in the drivers door armrest. The front switches are for the drivers and front passengers doors. The rear sw itches 3 are for the rear doors. Additiona l switches are located in the front passengers door and rear doors 3.
Depending on the vehicle equipm ent, the windows can be opened and closed from the outside using the remote control in vehicles with power windows in all doors. Remot e cont rol wit h mechanical key
Child safe ty system for rear windows 3
Hold button q or p on the remote control depressed until all windows have opened or comp letely closed.
Switch z between the rear switches in the drivers door arm rest z Forw ards (red field visib le): Rear door switches non-operational
48

Fault
If automatic opening a nd closing of the wind ow s is not possible, activ ate the wind ow electronics as follows: 1. C lose doors. 2. Sw itch on ignition. 3. O pen windows completely . 4. C lose the window and hold the button depressed at least 5 seconds. 5. Repeat for each window. For reasons of safety , the blind closes from its open p osition to approx. 20 cm. Hold down button H to close completely .
Sunblind on panoramic roof 3

To reduce the am ount of glare in the interior. Hold d own button q of rem ote control to open. To close, hold down b utton p or touch sensor in door handle for longer. The electronic key must be recognised w ithin the ex ternal reception range. It is ad visab le for the driver to keep the electronic key to hand. Function stand by after sw itching off the ignition terminates when the drivers door is opened.
Overload
If the wind ow s are rep eatedly operated at short interv als, the power supp ly is briefly cut off. The system is protected by fuses in the fusebox see page 184. To op en Press button G and sunblind opens as far as it will go. To close Press button H .
Seats, Interior
49
Seats, Interior
Front sea ts .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Head restraints .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Armrest 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Moving third row sea ts upright .... ..... . Lug gage compartment extension .... . Lug gage compartment cover 3... ..... . Safety net 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Lashing eyes 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Rails 3 a nd hooks 3 in lug gage compartment ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . FlexO rganizer 3... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Floor cov ering 3 in lugga ge compartment ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Notes on loading the vehic le .... .... ..... . Three-stage restraint sy stem .... .... ..... . Three-point seat belts .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Belt tensioners. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Using the belts ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Child restraint systems 3 . ..... .... .... ..... . Mounting brackets 3 for ISO -FIX child restra int system s ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fastening eyes 3 for Top-Tether child restra int system s ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Airbag system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ciga rette lig hter 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Accessory socket 3.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ashtray s 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fold away ta bles 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Stowage comp artm ents... ..... .... .... ..... . Drink holders 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sunvisors.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 49 51 52 53 54 57 58 60 60 60 62 62 63 63 64 65 68 68 69 69 78 78 79 79 79 81 81
Front seats
Adjust seat backrest
9 Warning
Imp ortant: Do not sit nea rer than 10 inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to permit safe airbag dep loy ment. Never adjust seats w hilst driving as they could mov e uncontrollably .
Adjust s eat longitudinally
To adjust, turn hand wheel at sid e of sea t while releasing any load on the seat bac krest. Move seat bac krest to suit sea ting position.
Adjust seat height 3
To adjust, pull handle on front seat, slide seat and release handle.
50
Seats, Interior
Adjust lumbar support 3
To adjust, press button at the front of the adjustment cushion and slide thigh support. Adjust thigh support to suit p ersonal requirements.
To adjust, use lever on the outside of the seat. Lever pumping m otion Up: S eat higher Down: S eat lower
Adjust seat incline 3
Seat pos ition
To adjust, turn handwheel on side of sea t backrest, releasing the loa d on the backrest. Ad just lumbar support to suit p ersonal requirements. To adjust, pull inner lever on front of seat, adjust inc line and release lever. Allow the seat to engag e audibly The incline is a djusted by shifting your body weight.
Adjust thigh s upport 3 of s ports seats 3
Adjust drivers sea t such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the drivers arms slig htly bent. Push front passeng ers seat as far bac k as possible.
Seats, Interior
The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back (recomm ended max im um tilting angle approx. 25).
51
9 Warning
Failure to ob serve the instructions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed according ly before starting-off.
Adjusting the head restraints of the ce ntre se at in the s econd row and the head restraints of the seats in the third row
Head restraint position
Head restraints
Adjusting the front he ad res traints and outboard re ar head res traints in the second seat row
The m id dle of the head restraint should be at eye lev el. If this is not possible for extrem ely ta ll persons, set to highest position, and set to lowest p osition for small persons.
To adjust, pull the head restraint up or press the catch to release. Then push the head restraint down. To fold the seats or in order to improve visibility when the seats are unoccupied, fold headrests all the way d ow n. If the seats are occupied , adjust height according to body size.
9 Warn ing
Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly before starting-off.
To adjust, press button on side and adjust height. If the seats are occ upied, a djust height according to body size.
52
Seats, Interior
Re moving the he ad res traints
Active he ad res traints 3
Armrest 3
Arm res t at drivers s eat
In the event of a rear-end impa ct, the active head restraints tilt forwards. The head is more effectiv ely supported by the head restraint and the danger of whiplash in the neck area of the cervical vertebra is reduced. Active head restraints are id entified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide sleev es.
Press and relea se the two catches. Pull and remove the head restraint.
Note
Push raised armrest ba ckwards against resistance a nd fold down. The armrest can be moved to d ifferent positions in stages by lifting it.
Only a tta ch loose objects or components to the head restraint on the front passengers seat if it is not in use.
Seats, Interior
Armrest in folded-down centre backrest
53
Moving third row seats upright
9 Warning
K eep hands away from hinge area when the seats are being moved upright, - risk of injury .
Slide centre head rest all the w ay down b y pressing the catc hes see page 51. Pull handle at bac k of centre backrest, fold back rest onto seat cushion and eng age see page 56. The centre seat back rest can be used as an armrest w hen fold ed down, and contains drink holders and stowag e compa rtm ents. To erect the seat back rest, pull handle on back rest, straighten back rest a nd engage. Remove floor covering 3. Removing lug gage compartment cover 3 see p age 57. Before mov ing the seats upright, slid e seat bench of second row of sea ts forwards by pushing forward the lever at the rig ht or left-hand side of the seat bench. The tip of the arrow at the seat bench must be in front of the square mark. Slide front sea ts forwards a little if necessary.
The seat belts must be routed through the belt holder as show n in the illustration. The latch plates must be inserted in the holder.
9 Warn ing
In the v ersion w ith Flex Organizer 3 see page 60, the belts m ust be suspend ed in the right and left seat belt ey es on the floor of the vehicle without tw isting, see Fig. 17420 T on pa ge 67. All components must b e removed from the rails in the luggage comp artm ent.
54
Seats, Interior
Lift up cover in floor betw een the seats a nd swiv el belt buckles upwa rd s, see Fig. 17386 T. Remove latch pla te and b elt from fixture.
Luggage compartment extension
9 Warning
The belt must not be routed through the belt hold er when the seat b elt is being worn.
The greatest a mount of luggag e compa rtm ent space is ob tained by removing the lugga ge c om partment cover 3 and folding the seats of the second and third row as well as the front passenger s seat 3, see following desc ription.
9 Warn ing
Keep hands awa y from hinges when folding seats or rows of seats, risk of injury. The back rests of the seats in the second row may only be moved to the v ertical position or tilted forwards in order to extend the lugga ge c om partment. Passengers must not sit in the seats if they are in this position.
From luggage c om partment, use one hand to lift seat by the handle, swivel back and move upright until it audibly engages. Use other hand to supp ort top of back rest, see Fig. 17372 T.
Move sea t bench in second row of seats to required position and eng age by pushing lever on right or left-hand sid e of sea t bench forwards see pag e 20, Fig. 17367 T. Fit luggage comp artm ent cover 3 b y fitting behind the third row of seats see p age 58.
Seats, Interior
Lowering seats in third row into floor of vehicle
55
Removing luggage com partment c ov er 3 see page 57. Before folding the seats in, slide seat bench of second row of seats forw ards by pushing forward the lever at the rig ht-hand or left-hand side of the seat bench. The tip of the a rrow at the sea t bench m ust be in front of the squa re ma rk . Slide front seats forwards a little if necessary. Push down head restraints of seats in third row releasing spring catches by pressing.
Guide seat belts through holder as shown in illustration a nd insert latch plates into holder. If the Flex Organizer 3 comp onents are used see pag e 60, the seat belts of the third row of seats can be unhooked from the floor of the vehicle see page 67, Fig. 17420 T. Secure deta ched b elt hooks to holder magnets see page 60 Fig. 17399 T.
From luggage compartment, press button at top of seat bac krest a nd swivel b ackrest forward. Raise seat b y handle at rear and swivel backrest further forwards until seat is lowered into vehicle floor. Hold seat by ha ndle during the entire swivelling proc edure.
Lower b oth sea ts if required.
56
Seats, Interior
Folding down backrests of outboard seats in se cond row Folding down centre backres t in se cond seat row
Push belt buckles into recess in floor and close cover. Move seat benc h in second row of seats to req uired position and engage by pushing lev er on right or left-hand side of seat benc h forwards see page 20, Fig. 17367 T. Fit lug gage compartment cover 3 behind second row of sea ts see page 57. Raising seats in third row see pag e 53. Lug gage compartment cover 3 see page 57. Safety net 3 see page 58. Lashing eyes see page 60. FlexO rganizer 3 see p age 60. Remove luggage comp artm ent cover 3 if necessary see page 57. Press side knob and slide down head restra ints of outboard seats in second row. Plac e sea t belt b uck les in pockets in seat bench. Push down release lever at one or both backrests, then m ov e b ackrests to a vertical p osition or tilt forwards or fold flat onto sea t bench and engage. To move up rig ht, push release lever down and latch back rest in required position. Push c entre head restraint down as far as possible, pressing catches to release. Place seat belt buckles in pockets in seat bench. Pull upper handle on rea r of centre bac krest, move bac krest to a v ertical position or fold flat on to seat cushion and eng age. To mov e seat up rig ht, pull front handle of folded -ov er ba ckrest, mov e upright and eng age in required position.
Lower second row and push forwards

Remove luggage compartment cover 3 if nec essary see pag e 57. S lid e head restraints d ow n by pushing knobs at side and releasing catches. Place seat belt buckles in seat bench pockets.
Seats, Interior
Folding down the front passe ngers seat 3
57
Luggage compartment cover 3

Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects on the cover. Before opera ting the luggage compa rtm ent cover, the rear seat belts must be fed through the side belt holders, see Fig. 17390 T. S ecure unhooked hooks 3 of seat belts of third row of seats to sid e holder ma gnets see page 67, Fig . 17399 T.
To close :
Raise seat cushion in second row by pushing handle 1 on right or left hand side of seat bench down and p ushing up seat benc h until it locks into position. Push down release lever 2 at both outboard back rests, ra ise backrests and latch into position. Pull top handle on back of centre back rest, move back rest to vertica l position and latch into position. Push down lever 3 to rig ht or left of seat benc h, m ov e seat bench as far forw ards as possible and latch into position. To move upright, press lever 3 and slide seat b ench to req uired position. Ad just back rest angles and swivel seat cushion down using lever 1. All positions must audibly latch.
Pull the cov er towards the rear using the handle and engage it in the retainers a t the sides. Press knob at side and slide front passengers seat head restraint downwards. Push front p assengers seat back wards. Fold front passengers seat forwards by ra ising release lev er and latch into p osition.
To open:
Straighten front passe ngers seat backre st 3

Raise release lever and allow front passengers seat ba ckrest to enga ge audibly.
Notes on loading
see p age 62. Remove lugga ge compartm ent cover from side brackets. It rolls up automa tica lly .
58
Seats, Interior
Stow age in front of tailgate Fitting
Removing
O pen the lug gage compartment cover. Move release lever on right side of luggage compartment cover upward. Lift right cover and remove from brackets.
Fitting
Insert luggage compa rtm ent cover in aperture, pull release lever at right side upwards, insert right luggage compartment cover and enga ge.
With the third row of seats up right, stow lugg age compartment c ov er in rear position: insert left luggag e com partment cover into aperture, fold release lever at rig ht-hand side upwards, insert and engage right luggage comp artment cover.
There are two installation openings in the roof frame: suspend and engage rod of net at one sid e, com press rod and suspend and engage at other side.
Safety net 3
The safety net can be fitted behind the second row of seats or, if the seats in the second row are folded, behind the front seats. Pa ssengers m ust not be transported behind the safety net.
S uspend hooks of net tensioning belts in lashing eyes in floor b ehind the second row of seats and tension, or
Seats, Interior
Remove safety net. Place tensioning straps as shown in illustration and align to net.
59
Fasten Velcro tape tightly about the net nex t to the length adjusters. The length adjusters and net rods must lie flat nex t to each other, see illustration.
Suspend hooks of net tensioning belts in slots behind front seats and tension.
Removing
Raise length adjuster of the net tensioning belt and move belt to one side. Comp ress the upp er net rod and rem ove from the fitting openings.
Roll the upper net rod down to approximately over the m iddle. Plac e the up per net rod over the tensioning straps next to the lower net rod . The hook s on the upper net rod must point awa y from the lower net rod. Push d ow n low er lever to right or left of seat bench to raise seat bench of sec ond row of seats see p age 56. Slide safety net into receptacle beneath seat bench, fold seat bench downwards and engage.
Stowage of s afety ne t
60
Seats, Interior
Lashing eyes 3
Rails 3 and hooks 3 in luggage compartment
FlexOrganizer 3
Lashing eyes in the luggage compartment serve to secure items being transported against slipp age, e. g. using lashing stra ps 3, a lugg age net 3 or safety net 3. In v ersion with FlexO rganizer 3 the eyes for securing the removable seat belts must not be used as lashing ey es. The seat belts in the third row of seats m ust nev er be used for securing loads.
The side walls of the luggage compartm ent house two ra ils. I nsert the hooks in the desired position in the rails: insert the hook in the upper groove on the rail and press in the lower groov e. Pull off the hook to remove. When the FlexO rganizer rails and components 3 are being used (with the exc eption of the pa rtitioning net in front of the ta ilg ate) see page 61, the sea ts in the third row must b e folded in see pa ge 55, and the seat belts must be unhook ed from the floor see page 67, Fig . 17420 T. Sec ure released sea t belt hooks to belt holder magnets see page 67, Fig. 17399 T.
Flex ib le system for dividing the lugga ge compa rtm ent or securing the load . When the FlexO rg aniz er comp onents are being used (with the exception of the partitioning net in front of the tailgate), the seats in the third row must be fold ed in see p age 55, a nd the seat belts must be unhooked from the floor see page 67, Fig. 17420 T. Secure released seat belt hooks to belt holder magnets, see Fig. 17399 T.
Seats, Interior
Variable partition ne t Luggage hooks and net pocket
61
The system consists of z adapters z variable partition net z mesh pockets for the side walls z hooks in the lugga ge c om partment The c om ponents a re fitted in two guide rails in the side panels of the luggage compartment using a dapters and hooks. The p artitioning net c an also b e fitted in the fram e in front of the tailgate.
Insert an adapter into each rail: fold open the ha ndle plate, insert adapter into upper and lower g roove of rail and move to required position. Sw iv el handle plate up wards to loc k the a dapter. The rods of the net m ust be extended before inserting into the ad apters: pull out each of the four end pieces and lock by rotating clock wise. To install, push rods together a little and insert into the relev ant openings in the adapters. The long er rod must be inserted into the upper a dapter.
Insert lug gage hooks into required position in rails: to do this, insert hook s in upp er groove of rail and push into lower groove. N et pocket can b e suspended from the luggage hooks.
P artitioning ne t in front of tailgate
62
Seats, Interior
The p artitioning net c an be fitted in the recesses in the p anel in front of the tailgate with the third row of seats upright. This prevents the load from falling out when the tailgate is op ened . The four rod end pieces of the net m ust be pushed in before installation by rotating each end piece antic lock wise and pushing in. To install, push rods of partitioning net together a little and insert into the relevant openings in the panel. The longer rod must be inserted a t the top. For easier loading with the third row of seats upright, first insert the rod, load the luggage compartment and then insert the upper rod .
Notes on loading the vehicle
z When transporting objects in the lug gage comp artment, fit safety net 3 see page 58. z Close the lugga ge compartment cover 3 to prevent the objects from being reflected in the rear window. z If the b ackrests are not folded down when transp orting objects in the lug gage compartment, they must b e engaged in their upright position see page 56. z Do not allow the load to protrude above the upper edg e of the backrests of the seats in the second row or, if the second row seats have been removed, above the up per edge of the front seat bac krests. z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit (cushion) 3 must always be freely accessible. z Do not place any objects on the luggage compartment cover 3 and on the instrument pa nel. They are reflected in the glass, obstruct the driver s view and will be thrown through the vehicle in the event of hard braking, for exam ple. z Objects m ust not be stored in the a irb ag inflation area, because they could cause injury if the airbag system is trig gered. z The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, handbrake and gear selector, or hinder the freedom of movement of the driver. Do not place any unsecured ob jects in the interior.
Removing
Push rod of pa rtitioning net together and rem ov e from the adapters and the recesses in the p anel. Adapter: fold op en the reta iner, release the adap ter from the lower groove and remov e from the upp er groove. Disengage luggage hook from the rails.
z Heavy objects in the luggag e compa rtm ent should b e plac ed a gainst the engaged rear seat bac krests or, if the rea r seat bac krests a re folded down, against the front seat ba ckrests. If objec ts are to be stacked , the heavier objec ts should b e plac ed at the bottom. Unsecured objects in the luggag e compa rtm ent would be thrown forw ards with great forc e in the event of heav y braking, for exa mple. z Secure heavy objects with lashing straps 3 attached to lashing eyes see page 60. If heav y loads slip when the vehicle is braked heavily or driven around a bend, the handling of the vehicle m ay change. z Secure loose a rticles in lugg age compa rtm ent using FlexOrga nizer 3 or luggage net 3 to prevent sliding.
Floor covering 3 in luggage compartment
When the third row of seats is not in use and are folded away a cover ca n be placed over the luggag e com partment floor.
Seats, Interior
z Do not drive with luggage compartment op en when transporting bulky objects, for exam ple, since tox ic exhaust fumes could penetrate the interior. z Weights, payload a nd roof load see pa ge 217. z Driv ing with a roof loa d increases the sensitivity of the vehicle to crosswinds and has a detrim ental effect on vehicle handling d ue to the vehicles higher centre of g ra vity. For driving with a roof load see pag es 142, 144, 164. z The front seat b elts are pulled down at the b elt buckles. This means the belts fit snugly , the oc cup ants are decelerated early with the vehicle and the body loading is red uced. z The airbag sy stems a re also triggered in the ev ent of serious accidents and form a safety cushion for the occupants. Depending on the severity of the accident, the front a irb ags inflate in two stages.
63
Three-point seat belts
9 Warning
Disreg ard of these instructions may lead to injuries or end ang er life. Vehicle passengers must b e informed according ly .
9 Warning
The airb ag systems serve to supplement the three-point seat b elts and belt tensioners. The sea t belts must therefore alway s be w orn. Disreg ard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or end ang er life. Vehicle passengers must be inform ed according ly . Read the instructions supplied with the child restraint system ! The vehicle is equipped with three-point seat belts with automatic retrac tors and locking d evices, allowing freedom of body mov ement although the spring tensioned belts always ensure a snug fit. For information on correct seating position see pages 50, 65, 70. The belts are loc ked during heavy acc eleration or deceleration of the vehic le.
Three-stage restraint system

Com prising: z Three-point seat belts, z Belt tensioners at the front seats, z Airbag sy stems for driver s sea t, front passengers seat and the outboard sea ts of the second row of seats 3 . The three stages are activated in sequence depending on the seriousness of the accident: z The automatic seat belt locking d evices prevent the belt strap from b eing pulled out and thus ensure that the vehicle occ upa nts are retained in their seats.
9 Warn ing
Alw ays wear your seat belt, and that mea ns also in urb an traffic and when you are a rear seat passenger. It can save your life! Also, pregnant women must always wear a seat b elt see page 65.
64
Seats, Interior
In the event of an accident, persons not wearing seat belts endanger their fellow occupants and themselv es. Control indicator X 3 for the seat belt see page 84. Seat belts are only designed for use by one person at a tim e. They are not suitable for persons young er than 12 years of age or smaller than 150 cm. For children up to 12 yea rs of ag e, w e recom mend the Vaux hall child restraint system see page 68.
Belt tensioners
Control indicator v for be lt tensioners
Belt force limiters
Belt force limiters on the front seats reduce the b od y load d ue to dam ped release of the b elt on a collision. This means that the occupants move forwa rd s under control.
Inspection of belts
Check all parts of the belt system occasiona lly for damag e and function. Replace damaged parts. Following an accident, ha ve the belts and deployed belt tensioners replaced by a workshop. Do not perform a ny alterations on the belts, their anchora ges, the autom atic retractors or the b elt buckles. Make sure that belts are not dam aged or trapped by sharp-edged objects.
The front seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners. The seat belts are pulled down at the buck les on a front or rear-impac t above a certa in severity. This tightens the belts.
Actuation of be lt tens ioners
Ac tuation of belt tensioners is indicated by illumination of control indica tor v, see Fig. 17105 T. If the belt tensioners are d eployed, these must b e replaced by a workshop. Further inform ation see page 65.
The function of the belt tensioners is monitored elec tronically together with the airbag sy stems and indicated by control indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for app rox . 4 seconds. If it does not illum inate, does not go out a fter 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driv ing, there is a fault in the belt tensioner or a nd airbag systems. The systems may fail to trigger in the event of an ac cident. Deployment of the belt tensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of v.
9 Warn ing
Immediately rectify the cause of the fault. S elf-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of faults.
Seats, Interior
Important
z Acc essories and other objects not specifically app rov ed for y our v ehicle ty pe must not be a ffixed or placed within the action zone of the belt tensioners (near the belt buckles) a s this could result in injury if the belt tensioners are trigg ered . z Do not m ake any modifications to the com ponents of the belt tensioners, a s this will render the vehicle unroadworthy . z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety reg ulations applicable to this must b e observed. H ave the vehicle d isposed of by a comp any which reuses vehicle parts.
65
9 Warn ing
On pregnant women in particular, the lap belt must be p ositioned as low as possib le across the pelvis so as not to put too m uch pressure on the abd om en.
Using the belts

Fitting the belt
9 Warning
Inc orrect hand ling (e.g. removal or fitting of b elts or belt buc kles) can trigger the belt tensioners with risk of injury. z The belt tensioner and airbag sy stem control electronics c an be found in the centre c onsole area. I n ord er to av oid malfunctions, do not store magnetic ob jects in this area. z When using the rear seats, ensure that the front b elt comp onents are not damaged by shoes or other objects. Av oid dirt getting into the retractors. z We recom mend that y ou ha ve the front seats removed by a workshop in the event of a ctua tion of the belt tensioners. z The belt tensioners are deployed onc e only, indicated by illumination of v. Deployed belt tensioners m ust be replaced by a workshop .
Pull the belt out of the retrac tor and guid e it a cross the body, m aking certain that it is not twisted . Insert the latch plate into the buck le. The front seat back rest must not be tilted back too far or the seat belt will not op erate properly. The recommend ed maximum a ng le of inclination is 25. Mak e sure that the lap b elt is not twisted and that it fits snugly across the body. Tension the belt frequently whilst driving b y tugg ing the diagonal pa rt of the belt.
Thick lay ers of clothing prevent the belt from fitting snugly. The b elt must not rest aga inst hard or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pen, keys, specta cles), since this could cause injury. N o objects such as handbags, mobile phones etc. must be present between the belt and y our b od y.
66
Seats, Interior
To remove the belt, depress the red push button on the buckle; the belt will retract automatically.
Height adjus tme nt
Seat belts in the s econd row
Height adjustm ent of the up per anchorage point of the front belt and outboard belts in the second seat row: 1. Pull belt out slightly. 2. Press down b utton on adjuster slid e. 3. Move a djuster slide up or down. 4. Allow sliding adjuster to audibly latch. Do not adjust height whilst d riv ing.
Ad just height such that the belt passes ov er the wea rers shoulder and rests against the shoulder. It must not pass over the neck or upper arm.
Re moving the belt
When adjusting sec ond seat row to enlarge luggage compa rtm ent, plac e sea t belt buckles in pockets in seat bench as shown in illustration. The seat belt for the centre seat ca n only be pulled out of the inertia reel if the bac krest is latched in the rearmost position.
Seats, Interior
Seat belts in the third row
67
Unhookable seat belts 3 in the third row
To ma ke b etter use of the rails and Flex Organizer components 3 in the luggage c om partment, the seat belts in the third row of seats ma y be rem ov ed from the seat belt eyes on the floor of the vehicle when the seats are fold ed d ow n.
O pen the cover in the floor between the seats a nd pull up the b elt buckles. Remove latch plate a nd sea t belt from belt holder.
When not in use, route the seat belt through the b elt holder as shown in the illustration, and insert the latch p la te into the holder.
9 Warning
The belt must not be routed through the belt holder when the seat belt is b eing worn. To do this, press spring -load ed ta b and unhook hooks from the seat belt ey es on the floor of the vehicle. Reel up the seat belt and a tta ch hooks to m agnet of seat belt holder, see Fig. 17399 T. To reinstall the sea t belt, remove hook from ma gnetic holder, push spring-loa ded tab at hook a nd fit seat belt ey e in floor of vehicle. The seat b elt must not be twisted and the hook must be prop erly enga ged in the seat belt ey e with the sp ring-loaded tab closed again.
68
Seats, Interior
To move the seat belts for the third row of seats as shown in Fig . 17370 T on page 67, feed through a belt hold er and insert latch plate in bracket.
Child restraint systems 3
When using a c hild restra int system , note the instructions for insta lla tion and use. The country in which you are travelling may not permit the use of child restraint sy stems on certain seats. Alway s c om ply with the local or national regulations.
z Do not stick any thing on the child restra int systems and do not cover them with any other m aterials. z Only a llow the child to enter and exit on the side of the vehicle facing away from the road. z A child restraint sy stem which has been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. z Secure or remov e child restraint sy stems carried in the vehicle when not in use.
9 Warning
Before m ov ing the third row of seats upright, all components must be removed from the rails in the luggage com partment a nd the seat belts suspended in the sea t belt eyes in the floor of the vehicle without twisting. The belt must not be routed through the belt holder when the seat belt is b eing worn.
Se lecting the right s yste m
Your child should travel facing ba ckwards in the vehicle for as long as possible. A child ha s a v ery weak cervica l spinal column a nd in the event of an ac cident is less likely to suffer injury in a rearward-facing, semilying position than if seated upright. Permitted options for child restraint mounting see page 228.
Mounting brackets 3 for ISO-FIX child restraint systems
Important
z Unhookable seat belts in the third row of seats are identified by a marker lab el on the belt. z When the seat b elt is being worn, the seat belt hook must b e installed in the eye in the floor of the v ehicle and the seat belt must not be led through the seat belt holder. z The unhooked seat belts in the third row of seats m ay only be a ttac hed to the prov ided eyes in the floor of the vehicle see pa ge 67, Fig. 17420 T. z The ey es and the seat belts of the third row of seats m ay not be used for lashing load s. z There must b e no ob jects in the seat belt hooks.
9 Warning
Never carry child restraint systems on your lap, risk of fatal injury.
Note
z C hildren under 12 years or under 150 cm tall should only travel in an appropriate child safety seat. z When transporting children, use the child restraint systems suitable for the childs weight. z Ensure correct installation of child restraint system, see the instructions enclosed with the system. z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint system can be wiped clean. The brackets located between the backrest and seat cushion are used for mounting IS O-FIX child restraint sy stems. The instructions ac com panying the ISO -FI X child restraint system are to be expressly followed. O nly ISO -FIX child restraint sy stems permitted for the vehicle may be used.
Seats, Interior
69
Fastening eyes 3 for Top-Tether child restraint systems
Airbag system
There are tw o eyes for central attachment of Top-Tether child restra int systems in the crossmember behind the outboard back rests of the second row of seats. The strap of the Top -Tether child restraint system m ust run below the hea d restraint between the two guide rods. Please be sure to follow the instructions provided with the Top-Tether child restraint sy stem. When using ISO -FIX and Top-Tether for seat m ounting, universally permitted child restraint sy stems for IS O-FIX may be used.
Front airbag
The front airbag sy stem is triggered: z depending on the sev erity of the accident, z depending on the ty pe of im pact, z within the range shown in the illustration, z ind epend ent of side a irba g 3 and curtain a irb ag system 3. Exception: Front p assengers seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition sy stem dea ctivates the front and side airbags 3 on the passenger s side if the front passengers seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passengers seat. For seat occupancy recognition see pag e 74. For Vauxhall child restra int system with transpond ers 3 see p age 77.
The front airbag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and above the glove compa rtm ent. The front airb ag system comprises: z an airbag with inflator in the steering wheel and a second one behind the trim panel above the g lov e comp artment, z control electronics with impac t sensors, z control indicator for airb ag sy stems v in instrument cluster, z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the instrum ent cluster.
70
Seats, Interior
Ex amples of events triggering the front airbag sy stem: z Impact a gainst a non-yielding obsta cle: the front a irb ags are triggered at low vehicle speed . z Impact against a y ielding obstacle (such as another v ehicle): the front airbags a re only triggered a t a higher vehicle speed.
9 Warning
The front airbag sy stem provides optimum p rotection when the seat, back rest and hea d restraint are c orrectly adjusted: Adjust the drivers seat according to the occupants height suc h that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the a rea of its upper sp ok es with the d riv ers arms slightly bent. The front passeng ers seat should be as far back as p ossible, with the back rest upright see pages 3, 49, 50. Do not place the head, b od y, hands or feet on the c ov ers of the airbag sy stems. Do not place any objects in the area in which the airb ags inflate. Im portant inform ation see page 75.
9 Warn ing
The three-point seat belt must b e correctly fitted see pag e 65. The front airbag sy stem will not be triggered in the ev ent of z the ignition being switched off, z minor frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a side or rear-imp act,
When trigg ered , the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the d riv er and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat occupants is c hecked, thereby sub stantially reducing the risk of injury to the upp er body and hea d. N o impairment of view will occur, b ecause the airbags infla te and deflate so q uick ly.
Seats, Interior
that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to the occ upa nts.
71
Side airbags 3
9 Warning
Seat belts must a lw ays b e worn. The front airb ag system serves to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you do not w ear your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or ev en thrown from the v ehicle, in the ev ent of an acc id ent. If an accident occurs the belt helps to maintain the correct seat position that is required for the front airba g system to prov ide y ou with effective protection. In add ition, the front a irb ag system w ill not be trig gered for the front passengers seat in v ersions with seat occupa ncy recognition 3 if z the front passengers seat is unoccupied, z there is a prop erly fitted Va ux ha ll child restraint system with transponders. For seat occupancy recognition see page 74. For Vauxhall child restraint system with tra nsponders see page 77. The side a irb ag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the outb oa rd sides of the front seat backrests. The side a irb ag system c om prises: z an airbag with infla tor in the back of the drivers and front passengers seat respectively , z the control electronics, z the side-impact sensors, z control indicator for airb ag sy stems v in instrument cluster, z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the instrum ent cluster.
The side airbag sy stem is triggered: z depending on the sev erity of the accident, z depending on the ty pe of im pact, z within the range shown in the illustration on the centre d oor pillar of the drivers or front passenger s side, z ind epend ently of the front airbag sy stem.
72
Seats, Interior
Ex cep tion: Front pa ssengers seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The sea t occupancy recog nition sy stem deac tiv ates the front and side airbags 3 on the front passengers side if the front passeng ers seat is unoccupied or a Vaux hall child restraint sy stem with transponders has been fitted to the front passeng ers seat. For seat occupancy recognition see page 74. For Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders see pa ge 77.
9 Warning
There must be no objects in the area in which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea between the seat backs and the vehicle body . Do not place the hands or a rm s on the covers of the airba g systems. Imp ortant information see page 75. The three-point seat belt must always be correctly fitted see page 65. The side airba gs will not be triggered in the event of z the ig nition being sw itched off, z fronta l collisions, z accidents in which the v ehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear-impact, z Sid e-on collisions outside the passenger cell. In addition, the side airbag system 3 will not b e triggered for the front pa ssengers seat in versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 if z the front passeng ers seat is unoccupied, z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child restraint system with transpond ers. For seat occupancy recognition see page 74. For Vauxhall c hild restraint system with transponders see page 77.
Curtain airbag 3
The curtain a irba g system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. The curtain a irba g system com prises: z an airbag w ith inflator in the roof frame on the d riv ers and front passengers side respectively, z the control electronics, z the side-imp act sensors, z control indicator for airbag system s v in instrument cluster.
When triggered, the side a irba g infla tes within milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passeng er in the respective door area. This substantially red uces the risk of injury to the upper body and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision.
Seats, Interior
73
The curtain airbags will not b e triggered in the event of z the ignition being switched off, z frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear-imp act, z Side-on c ollisions outside the passeng er cell.
Control indicator v for airbag sys tem s

The c urtain airbag sy stem is triggered: z depending on the severity of the accident, z depending on the typ e of impa ct, z within the range shown in the illustration on the centre door pillar of the driver s or front passenger s side, z together with the side airbag sy stem 3, z irrespective of seat occupancy recognition 3, z independently of the front airbag system . When the curtain airbag is triggered it inflates w ithin milliseconds and provides a safety barrier in the hea d area on the respective side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of injury to the head considerably in case of a side-impact. The curtain airb ag system does not protect persons in the seats in the third row of seats.
9 Warning
There must be no objects in the area in which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea between the seat backs and the vehicle body . Do not place the hands or arms on the c ov ers of the airbag sy stems. Imp ortant information see page 75. The three-point seat belt must always be correctly fitted see page 65. The function of the airbag sy stems is monitored electronica lly together with seat occupancy recognition 3 and the belt tensioners and shown by control indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for app rox . 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go out a fter 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driv ing, there is a fault in the airbag systems, seat occupancy
74
Seats, Interior
sy stem. O nly then m ay a child restraint sy stem with transponders 3 be fitted on the front passengers seat. system rem ains activated. Pay attention to the control indicator y for seat occupancy recognition 3.
recognition 3 or the belt tensioners see also page 64. The systems may fail to trigger in the event of an ac cident. Dep loy ment of the airbags is ind icated by continuous illumination of v.
9 Warn ing
Only Vauxhall c hild restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 c an be fitted on the front passeng ers seat. Use of systems without tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 are identified by a stick er or label.
9 Warning
Have the cause of the fault rectified im med ia tely by a work shop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system permits rap id rectification of faults. The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags 3 for the front pa ssengers seat if the front pa ssenger seat is not occ upied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is fitted on the front passengers sea t. The curtain airbag system 3 rem ains activ ated. The c ontrol indicator for seat occupancy recognition y app ears in the instrument cluster. If the control indicator y illuminates for a pprox. 4 seconds once the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is fitted with seat occupa ncy recognition, see Fig . 17117 T on the nex t page. If a Vauxhall c hild restra int system with transponders 3 is fitted, the control indicator y illuminates perm anently after switching on the ignition a s soon as the system has detected the child restraint
Seat occupancy recognition 3
Control indicator y for Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition are also identified by a sticker on the lower panel of the front passenger s seat see illustra tion ab ov e. Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith tra nsponders 3 are automatically detected if correctly fitted to the front passengers seat. When these child restra int system s a re being used on the front passenger s seat, the front and side airbag systems for the front passengers seat are dea ctiv ated. The curtain airbag
The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint system with tra nsponders 3 is indicated by the continuous illumination of control indicator y in the instrument cluster once the ignition has been switched on and the seat oc cup anc y recog nition system has detected the child restraint system .
Seats, Interior
If no Vaux hall child restra int system s with tra nsponders 3 are fitted , the c ontrol indica tor m ust not come on or flash as the airbag systems for the front passengers seat would not be triggered. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop.
75
Important
z Accessories a nd other objects must not be affixed or placed in the area in which the airbags inflate as they could ca use injury if the airbags are triggered. z Do not place any objec ts between the airbag systems and the vehicle occupants; risk of injury.
9 Warning
If the Vauxhall child restraint system with transp onders 3 has b een fitted according to the instruc tions, the control indicator for Vaux hall child restraint sy stems with transp onders must illuminate in the instrument cluster when the ig nition is switched on. If the control indicator does not c om e on whilst driving, the airbag systems for the front passengers seat are not deactivated, risk of fatal injury . Fit child restraint system on the rear sea t. Have the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop .
9 Warn ing
Never ca rry child restraint systems or other objects on your lap, risk of fa ta l injury. z Only use the hooks 3 on the handles in the roof fram e to hang up light articles of clothing or coat ha ngers. Do not place any objects in the pockets of the hanging items, risk of injury . z The airbag sy stems and belt tensioner control electronics can be found in the centre console area. In order to av oid malfunctions, do not store mag netic objects in this a rea. z Do not stick any thing on the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seat backrests or roof frame, in the vicinity of the airbags, or on the front p assengers seat cushion, or cover any of those areas with other materia ls.
If the control indicator does not com e on whilst d riv ing , the front and side airbags 3 for the front p assengers seat are not deactiv ated, and the life of the child ma y be enda ngered. Fit child restraint system on the rear seat. H ave the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. If the child restraint sy stem is not correctly installed or the tra nsponder is faulty, the control indica tor flashes. C heck for correct installation of child restraint system. To install the child restraint sy stem with transponders 3 see the instructions enclosed with the system. If the control indicator for Vauxhall child restraint sy stems with transponders 3 flashes when the child restra int system is fitted c orrectly, there is a risk to the child. Fit child restraint sy stem on the rear seat. Hav e the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop.
76
Seats, Interior
z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to clean the steering wheel, instrum ent panel, front seat b ackrests, roof fram e and seat cushion of the front passengers seat. Do not use a ny aggressiv e c leaning agents. z Only protective covers which are approved for your vehicle with sid e airb ag sy stem may be fitted on the front seats. When fitting the protective c ov ers, make sure that the airba g units on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests are not c ov ered. z The airbag system s are triggered independently of each other depending on the severity of the a ccident and the ty pe of im pact. The sid e airba g system and the curtain airbag sy stem 3 are trigg ered together. See pa ge 74 for exceptions. z Each airbag is triggered once only. Have deployed airbag s replaced immediately by a work shop. z The speeds, directions of movement and deformation properties of the vehicles, and the properties of the obstacle concerned, d eterm ine the severity of the accident and trig gering of the airb ags. The degree of damag e to y our v ehicle and the resulting repa ir costs alone a re not indicative that the criteria for trigg ering of the airba gs were met. z Do not m odify airbag system com ponents, since this would render the vehicle unroadworthy.
9 Warning
If handled improperly the airbag systems can be triggered in an exp losive m anner risk of injury! z We recommend having the steering wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling parts, the door seals, the handles and the seats removed by a workshop. z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety reg ulations applicable to this must b e observed. H ave the vehicle d isposed of by a comp any which reuses vehicle parts. z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should only travel on the rear seats. This does not apply to children who are travelling in child restraint systems with transp onders 3. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, do not place any heavy objec ts on the front passenger s seat otherwise the airbag system s for the front p assengers seat may b e triggered in the event of an accident. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, to prev ent malfunctions do not use protective c ov ers or extra seat cushions on the front passeng ers seat.
z In order to p revent malfunctions when using a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 on the front passeng ers seat, no objects (e.g. plastic sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be placed und er the child restraint sy stem.
9 Warn ing
Child restraint systems as well as other objects must never be carried on the lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury . If carried in this way , child restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 in vehicles w ith seat occupancy recognition 3 could lead to front passenger s airb ag systems not being triggered in the event of an accident.
Seats, Interior
Use of child re straint systems 3 on the front passengers seat in vehicles with airbag systems , but without se at occupancy recognition 3
77
Use of child restraint systems 3 on front passengers se at in vehicles with airbag systems and se at occupancy recognition 3
9 Warning
No child restraint system 3 may be installed on front passenger s sea t. Da ng er to life.
9 Warn ing
Only Vauxhall c hild restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 c an be fitted on the front passeng ers seat. Use of systems without tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Vehicles with sea t occupancy recognition are identified by a stick er on the low er panel of the front passengers seat see Fig. 17116 T.
The side a irb ag system 3 is identified by the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the front seat back rests. Sea t occupancy recognition 3 see p age 74.
Versions with front p assengers seat airbag can be identified by the word AIRBAG over the g lov e com partment and the warning stic ker on the side of the instrum ent panel, visible when the p assengers d oor is op en see Fig . 17118 A.
Vehicles with sea t occupancy recognition can a lso be identified by control indicator y in the instrument cluster. If c ontrol indicator y illuminates for app rox . 4 seconds after the ignition is
78
Seats, Interior
switched on, the vehicle is eq uipp ed w ith seat occupancy rec og nition see page 74. The seat occupancy recognition system detects Vaux hall child restraint sy stems with transponders 3 and deactivates the front and sid e airbag sy stems 3 for the front passengers seat. The curtain airbag system 3 rema ins activa ted. For seat occupancy recognition see page 74.
Cigarette lighter 3
Accessory sockets ca n be found in the console between the front seats, the console in front of the second row of seats and on the right in the luggage compa rtm ent. Accessory sockets ca n be used to connect electrical ac cessories. The battery is discharged if the engine is sta tionary.
There is a cigarette lighter in the console between the front sea ts. Press in ciga rette lighter. Switches off autom atic ally once the element is glowing. Pull out lighter.
Accessory socket 3
Vauxhall child restraint sy stems with transponders 3 can be identified by a sticker on the child restraint system, see Fig . 17424 T. Do not dam age the soc kets by using unsuitable plugs. The maximum power c onsumption of electrical ac cessories m ust not ex ceed 120 w atts. Do not connect any current-delivering acc essories, e.g. electrical charging devices or b atteries. Electrical ac cessories connected to the socket must c om ply with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise v ehicle malfunctions may oc cur.
Seats, Interior
If the tyre repair kit is 3 is in op eration, no consumers may be c onnec ted to the auxiliary socket.
79
Foldaway tables 3
Located on the front seat back rests. O pen b y pulling upward until it eng ages. Fold away by pressing d ow n past the resistance point. Do not place any heavy objects on the table.
Ashtrays 3
To be used only for ash and not for combustible rubbish.
9 Warning
Failure to ob serve these descriptions can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed according ly .
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment 3 bene ath front passengers se at
Ashtray, front
To empty the a shtray, press the spring , op en ashtra y all the way and rem ov e.
As htray socket
O pen ashtray at recess. For universal use in the centre console, the door pockets in the inner panelling of all the doors and in the rear side p anelling. Open cover to use.
Lift stowage comp artm ent by grasping recessed edge and pull out from the front. Max imum load: 1. 5 k g. To close the stowage compartment, push it in a nd eng age.
80
Seats, Interior
Stow age compartment for glasses 3 Stowage compartments in the roof pane lling 3
Glove com partm ent
To open, pull hand le. There is a pen holder on the front of the open cov er. The g lov e com partment should be closed while the vehic le is in motion. Cooled glove compartment 3 see page 117.
On drivers sid e: fold down to open. Do not store heavy objects in the stowage compartment. Press marked locations to op en. The maximum permitted load of the two front stowage comp artm ents is 1 k g, and the maximum permitted load of the three stowage compartments in the rear is 2 kg. The stowage compa rtm ents must b e closed whilst driving.
Seats, Interior
Stowage com partm ents in the luggage compartment
81
Drink holders 3
More drink holders can be found in the centre back rest in the second seat row in the folded-down position. Fold centre backrest forwards by pulling handle on rear of centre back rest.
Sunvisors
The sunvisors can b e folded down or swivelled to the side to prevent d azzling. While travelling, the covers for the m irrors in the sunvisors should be closed .
The v ehicle tools with jack 3 and towing eye and the trailer coup ling ball bar 3 are stow ed beneath a hatch in the vehicle floor at the rear. To open the ha tc h, lift the carpeting then raise, rotate and lift the ring. The fusebox is behind the left hatch in the luggage compartment sid e pa nelling see page 184. The tyre repa ir k it is on the right-hand side behind the flap 3 see page 179. For first-aid kit (cushion), w arning triangle in the lugga ge com partment see page 174.
Drink holders can be found a t the front in the centre console between the front seats, the door pockets in the inner panelling of all the doors and in the rear side panelling.
82
In struments, Controls
Instruments, Controls
Control indicators
Control indicators .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 82 Instrument display ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 87 Information display . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 89 Warning buzzers.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 102 Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 102
The control indica tors described here are not present in all vehicles. The descriptions however, apply to all instrument versions.
The c ontrol indicator colours mean: z Red z Yellow z Green z Blue Dang er, im porta nt reminder, Warning, information, fault, Confirm ation of ac tiv ation, Confirm ation of ac tiv ation. Illumi nated Fault in O pen&Start system . Where necessary, lock or unlock the vehicle w ith the remote control or emergency key see page 37, or attempt to activate using the spare key. Emergency operation see pa ge 35. If 0 illumina tes, this can also mean that the steering column lock is still locked: move steering wheel to and fro a little and press Start/S top button a gain. If 0 illumina tes whilst d riv ing a system error has occurred that ma y eventually lead to a complete failure. If 0 illum inates or fla shes: The Start/Stop button must be held depressed slightly longer to switch off the ignition. It is possible that the vehic le will not start during the nex t start a ttempt. If 0 stay s on p ermanently or continues to flash, seek the assistance of a workshop immed iately.
83
Engine oil press ure
C ontrol indicator illuminates red. It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched on and g oes out shortly after the engine starts. I lluminat es when the engine is running Eng ine lubrication m ay be interrup ted. This ma y result in damage to the engine and/or locking of the drive wheels: 1. Move out of the flow of traffic a s quickly as possible without impeding other vehicles. 2. Depress clutch. 3. Shift manual transm ission or Easytronic 3 into neutral; for a utomatic tra nsmission 3 , set selector lever to N. 4. Switch off ignition.
Open&Start system 3, fault
Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. If i t flashes Sy stem has not detected electronic k ey in vehic le interior. The reasons for this may be: The electronic key is in the wrong location in the vehicle interior (do not put key in lugga ge com partment or in front of information disp la y), or the electronic key is not in the v ehicle interior, or influence from an external interference source (radio m asts, interfering transmitters in the v icinity ). or Electronic key failure, for emergency operation see page 35.
9 Warn ing
When the engine is off, considerably more force is needed to brake and steer. Do not rem ove key until vehicle has come to a standstill, otherw ise the steering colum n lock could enga ge unex pectedly. C heck oil level before consulting a workshop.
If the battery in the electronic key needs changing, I nS P3 a ppears in the service display or in v ehicles with check control 3 by an appropriate message in the inform ation d isplay see pag e 36.
84 R
In struments, Controls v
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP P lus) 3
Brake s yste m, clutch sys tem 3
Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. It illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the handbrak e is applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is too low. Further inform ation see pages 158, 205. For vehicles w ith Easytronic 3, the control indicator flashes for a few seconds when the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is not applied.
Alternator
C ontrol indicator illuminates red. It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched on and g oes out shortly after the engine starts. I lluminat es when the engine is running S top and switch off engine. Battery is not charging. Engine cooling ma y be interrupted . In diesel eng ines, p ow er to the brak e serv o unit m ay be cut. C heck drive belt condition a nd tensioning before contacting a w ork shop.
Control indica tor flashes or illuminates yellow. Fla shing during dr iving: System actively enga ged see page 148. Illumi nates whilst dr iving The sy stem is off 3 or there is a fa ult in the Elec tronic S tability Programme system see p age 148.
9 Warning
Illum inated when the handbrake is off: stop, im med ia tely stop journey. Seek the assistance of a workshop.
Se at belt 3
Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. Once the ignition is switched on, this stays on until the seat belt is fastened. The control indicator flashes when starting to drive. Fasten sea t belt see page 63.
Coolant temperature
C ontrol indicator illuminates red. I lluminat es when the engine is running S top and switch off engine. Coolant temperature too hig h: Danger of engine dam age. Check coolant lev el see pag e 204.
Airbag s yste ms 3, belt tensioners 3

Control indicator illum inates red. Ill uminates when the eng ine is runni ng Fault in airbag system or belt tensioners see pages 64, 73.
Door ope n
Control indica tor illuminates red. It illum ina tes when a door or the luggage compartment is open.
In struments, Controls A
Engine ele ctronics, transmission electronics 3, im mobilis er, die sel fuel filte r 3, fault IDS+ Inte ractive Dynamic Driving Sys tem 3, Continuous Damping Control (CDC) 3, SP ORT m ode 3
Control indica tor illuminates y ellow. It illum ina tes for a few seconds when the ignition is switc hed on. Illumi nates whilst dr iving Fault in the sy stem. S eek the a ssistance of a workshop. IDS+ see page 148, C DC see page 150, SPORT mode see page 150.
85
Exterior lights
C ontrol indicator illuminates green. It is illuminated when the exterior lights are on see pag e 105.
Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. It illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. Ill uminates when the eng ine is runni ng Fault in the engine electronics or transm ission electronics system. Electronic s switch to emergency running program me, fuel consum ption may increase and the drivability of the vehicle ma y be impaired see page 147. I mmediately seek the assistance of a workshop. Illuminated tog ether w ith I nSP4 in the service display: Have the d iesel fuel filter drained of water see page 203. If i t flashes w hen t he i gnition is on Fault in the electronic immobiliser system; the engine ca nnot be started see page 30.
P arking distance s ens ors 3
C ontrol indicator illuminates yellow . Fault in the system. Seek the assistance of a work shop. Parking distance sensors see page 152.
O
check ed1 )
Engine oil le vel 3
Control indica tor illuminates y ellow. The engine oil lev el is autom atic ally.
Turn s ignal lights
C ontrol indicator flashes green. The corresp onding c ontrol indicator flashes on the side selected. Both control indic ators flash with the hazard warning lights on. Fast flashing: failure of a turn signal light or associa ted fuse, failure of turn signal light on trailer 3. C ha nge bulbs see pa ge 187. Fuses see page 184.
Illumi nates when the engine is running Engine oil level too low . Check engine oil level and top up engine oil if necessa ry see p age 202.
Easytronic 3, start engine
Control indicator illum inates yellow. It illuminates if the footbrak e is not opera ted. The indica tor goes off a s soon as the footbrake is operated. The engine ca n only be started w ith the footbrak e opera ted see page 131.
1)
N ot for Z 20 LEH engine, for s ales d esig na tion see p ag e 212.
86 Y
In struments, Controls T
Winter programme of autom atic transmission 3 or Eas ytronic 3
Control indica tor is illuminated in tra nsmission display when Winter prog ra mme is enabled see pages 133, 139. I lluminat es when the engine is running Fault in the emission control system . The permitted em ission limits m ay b e exceeded. Immediately seek the assistance of a w ork shop. I f it flashes when the engi ne is running: Fault which may lead to damage to the cataly tic converter see pag e 147. Im mediately seek the assistance of a workshop.
Fuel level
Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. Ill uminated Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserv e area. If i t flashes Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately . Never let the tank run dry! Erratic fuel supp ly can cause catalytic converter to overheat see p age 146. Diesel engines: If the tank is run d ry , bleed the fuel sy stem as described on page 170.
SP ORT m ode of autom atic transmission 3 or Eas ytronic 3
Control indica tor is illuminated in tra nsmission display when SPO RT mode is enabled see pa ges 133, 138.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 3

C ontrol indicator illuminates red. I lluminat es whi lst driv ing Fault in Anti-lock Bra ke System see pag e 159.
>
Front fog lights 3
Se at occupancy re cognition 3
Control indicator illum inates green. It is illuminated when the front fog lights are on see page 106.
Control indica tor illuminates or flashes in od om eter disp la y. Illumi nated Sea t occupancy recognition has detected a child restraint system with tra nsponders. Airba g systems for the front passengers seat are dea ctiv ated see page 74. If it fl ashes Fault in system or child restraint with tra nsponder not correctly fitted see p age 74.
P reheating s yste m 3 , Dies el particle filter 3
Main beam
Control indicator illum inates blue. It is illuminated when main beam is on and during headlight fla sh see pages 10, 105.
C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes y ellow. I lluminat ed Preheating system active, only switches on at low outside temperatures. If it flashes (in vehic les fitted with a diesel particle filter) The diesel p artic le filter m ust be cleaned. Drive on, and a s soon as roa d and traffic conditions permit, increase your speed to over 25 m ph (40 km /h), cleaning of the diesel particle filter is then started. The control ind icator goes out as soon as
Fog tail light
Control indicator illum inates yellow. It is illuminated when the fog ta il lights are on see page 107.
Exhaust emission 3
Control indica tor illuminates or flashes yellow. It illum ina tes when the ignition is switched on a nd goes out shortly after the engine starts.
cleaning is comp lete. We recommend that you do not switch off the ignition during cleaning. Further information see pa ge 148.
87
Instrument display
Speedometer
In some versions, the pointers of the tachom eter, the speedometer and the fuel gauge briefly rotate to the end position.
Tachometer
Deflation De tection System 3, Tyre P re ssure Monitoring System 3

Cont rol indica tor illum inates red. Tyre pressure loss see page 154.
Control indicator illum inates red or y ellow.
Cont rol indica tor illum inates yellow . Fault in the system see pages 154, 156. Seek the assistance of a workshop .
Adaptive Forward L ighting (AFL) 3, fault

Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. Indicates eng ine speed. Warning: m aximum permitted speed exc eeded, engine at risk . Ill uminated Fault in the system. Seek the assistance of a w orkshop. If i t flashes Sy stem converted to sym metrical d ip ped beam. AFL see page 108.
S peed display.
Odometer display
m Cruis e control 3
Control indicator illum inates green. It is illuminated when the system is on see page 151.
Top line: Trip odometer Display of m iles / kilom etres cov ered since reset.
88
Se rvice display Trans miss ion display 3
To reset, hold the reset knob depressed for a few seconds with the ignition on. Bottom line: O dometer Record s the miles / kilometres travelled.
Fuel gauge
InSP
Serv ic e interval d isplay . Display of the rem aining distance to travel until the next S ervice. For more information see pa ge 200. Bulb failed 3 see pa ge 187. Battery v oltag e of remote control or electronic k ey of Open&S tart sy stem low 3 see pages 33, 36. Water in diesel fuel filter 3 . Seek the assistance of a workshop.
Display of gear selected on automa tic transmission 3 or current gear or mode for Easy tronic 3: P R N A M D 1-4 Park position of automatic transmission. Reverse gea r. N eutral. Automatic m od e of Easy tronic. Ma nual m ode of Easytronic. Automatic m od e of automatic transmission. C urrent gear of automa tic transmission.
Pointer in left z one or Y illuminated Pointer in left z one or Y fla shing
= Reserve area
InSP2 InSP3
= Refuel see page 145
InSP4
Never run the tank dry ! Diesel engines: If the tank is run d ry , bleed the fuel sy stem as described on page 170. Because of the fuel remaining in the ta nk , the a mount of fuel required to fill the tank may be less tha n the specified tank capac ity .
On vehicles with chec k control 3, a message is shown on the display instead of InSP2 and InS P3. ESPoff ESPon Electronic S tability Programme 3 off see page 148. Electronic S tability Programme 3 on see page 148.
1-6 3 Ma nual m ode, current gea r of automatic transmission. 1-5 Ma nual m ode, current gea r of Easytronic
For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a few seconds if A, M or R is selected when the engine is running b ut the footb ra ke is not dep ressed.
89
Board Information Display 3
Graphical Information Display 3, Colour Inform ation Display 3
Information display
Triple Information Display
11:25 }
RDS
21 .5C
[ TP]
BC 1 BC 2
Board Computer
Range
Timer
1 8
REG
12:01 17,0C FM 3 90,6 MHz

AS RDS TP
257.0 40
miles mph gals mpg
257miles
Display of time, outside temp erature a nd date / Infotainment system (when it is on). Display F in the display indica tes a fault. Have the ca use rectified by a workshop.
7.0 31.0
Display of time, outside temperature, date / Infota inment system (when it is on) and Electronic C lim ate Control (ECC ) 3. The Gra phic al Inform ation Display presents the information in monochrome. The Colour Information Display p resents the information in colour. The type of information and how it is displayed depends on the equipment of the vehicle and the settings of the trip computer 3, Elec tronic C limate Control (EC C) 3 and Infotainment system 3. S om e information appears in the d isplay in an ab breviated form. Electronic Clima te C ontrol (EC C) see pag e 125. Infotainment sy stem see Infotainment system instructions.
Display of time, outside tempera ture and date / Infotainment sy stem (when it is on). When the ignition is off, the time, date and outside tem perature can be presented for 15 second s b y briefly pressing one of the two buttons b elow the displa y. Display F in the display indicates a fa ult. Hav e the cause rec tified by a workshop .
90
Display F in the display indicates a fa ult. Hav e the cause rec tified by a workshop .
Triple Information Display

Set date and tim e
Outside temperature
Slippery road
8:56 -5 ,5 C 07.04.2004
-2, 5C
8:56 5 ,5C 07.04.2 004
OK In vehicles with Graphic al Inform ation Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3, a w arning message a ppears the disp la y as a warning for ic y roa d surfaces. There is no message below -5 C .
A fall in temperature is indica ted immediately and a rise in temp erature after a time delay . If outside tempera ture drops to 3 C, the sym bol : illuminates in the Triple Information Display or the Board Information Display 3 as a w arning for icy road surfac es. : remains illuminated until tem peratures reach at least 5 C.
Infotainment system off: press a nd ; below the d isplay as follows: Press for a pprox. 2 seconds: Day flashes ; : S et day : Month flashes ; : S et month : Y ear flashes ; : S et year : Hours fla sh ; : S et hours : Minutes flash ; : S et minutes : C lock is started.
9 Warning
C aution: The road surface ma y already be icy even though the disp lay indicates a few degrees above 0 C.
Corr ect ing tim e 3 Some RDS transmitters do not send a correct tim e signal. If the incorrect time is continually displayed, switch off automatic time sy nchronisation 3 and set the time manually see below. The a utomatic setting is indicated by } in the d isplay . Dea ctivating / activating automatic time synchronisation: Infotainment sy stem off, press and ; below the display: Hold down for approx. 2 sec., clock display is now in setting mode. Press twice (until y ear flashes). Press and hold down for approx. 3 seconds until } flashes in display 3 and the text "R DS TIME" app ears (years flash during this time). Press ;; display shows: RDS TIME 0 = O ff Press ;; display shows: RDS TIME 1 = O n Press three times.
91
Board Information Display 3, Selecting functions
Selection us ing arrow buttons
11:25 }
21 .5C
Range 257miles
Functions and settings of some equipment 3 can be a ccessed v ia the Board Inform ation Display . This is done using the m enus a nd buttons in the Infotainm ent system 3 or with the left a djuster wheel 3 on the steering w heel. The corresponding menu options are then shown in the following lines of the d isplay . If check control wa rning m essag es 3 a re display ed, the display is lock ed for other display s. Confirm warning message. If there is more than one wa rning message, confirm them one after the other. S elec t menu items from the Infotainment system using the buttons. O K b ut ton S elec t hig hlighted point, confirm comm and.
92
Sele ction using the left adjuste r wheel 3 on the steering wheel
Board Information Display 3, System settings
S om e information appears in the d isplay in an ab breviated form.
Correcting time 3
11:25 }
21 .5C
System
11:25}
21.5 C
Clo ck Sync.On
Turn up Previous menu item, Turn down Next m enu item, Press Select highlight, confirm comm ands. Sy stem settings see pag e 92. Trip computer see page 93.
Press the Settings b utton on the Infotainment sy stem. Menu item Audio or System will appear. Press the left arrow button to access the menu item Syst em . S elec t System menu item. The first function in the menu S ystem is highlighted. The functions are displayed in the following order: z z z z z z z z z Time synchronisation Time, setting hours Time, setting minutes Date, setting day Date, setting month Date, setting year Ignition logic Language selection Setting units of measure
S om e RDS transmitters d o not send correct time signa ls. If the incorrect tim e is displayed often, deactiv ate automatic time synchronisation 3 and set the time ma nually. The autom atic setting is ind ic ated b y } in the display . To correct time with the help of RDS, select the menu item for time sy nchronisation from the Settings m enu. Mak e the desired setting .
Setting date and time
Select the menu item for time and da te setting from the Settings menu. Make the desired setting. The setting is saved when the m enu item is exited.
93
Se tting units of measure
The functions are displayed in the following order: z z z z z z z Instantaneous consumption Average consum ption Effective consum ption Average speed Distance Range Stop watch
Ignition logic 3
11:25 }
21 .5C
See Infotainment sy stem instructions.
Language se lection
Unit Europe- SI
Instantane ous consumption
11:25}
21.5C
You can select which units of measure are to be used . Select the menu item for units of measure from the Sett ings menu and confirm the desired setting.
11:25}
31 mpg
21.5 C
English
Inst . Consumpt.
Board Information Display 3, trip computer 3

You ca n select the display language for som e functions. Select the menu item for language from the S et tings menu and mak e the desired setting.
The trip computer provides information on driving data, which is continually recorded and ev alua ted electronically. Ac cess trip computer v ehicle data by pressing the BC button on the Infotainment sy stem or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. Some information app ears in the disp lay in an abbreviated form. Once a n audio function has been selec ted, the sub sequent rows of the trip comp uter function are display ed.
Display c hanges depending on sp eed: Display in g al/h Display in m pg below 8 mp h (13 km/h), above 8 mph (13 km/h).
94
Range is calculated from current fuel ta nk content and instantaneous consumption. The display shows avera ge v alues. After refuelling, the vehic le updates the ra ng e automatically after a brief delay. If the fuel in the tank will a llow less than 30 miles (50 km) of trav el, the message "Range" appears in the display. If the fuel in the tank will a llow less than 20 miles (30 km) of trav el, the message "Refuel! " 3 appea rs in the display . Ac know ledge the m enu item as described on p age 95.
Average cons umption
Display of av erage consumption. The measurement can b e reset at any tim e and restarted, see "Reset".
Stop watch
Effective consumption
Display of fuel used . The m easurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset".
11:25}
21.5 C
Average speed
Display of av erage speed. The m easurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". Stoppag es in the journey with the ignition off are not included in the ca lc ulations.
Stop Watch 01:22:32 h

S elec t function, operate with the arrow buttons: Left arrow button S elec t menu item Start, start/stop w ith O K b utton Rig ht arrow button S elec t menu item Reset, reset with O K b utton O perating using the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel: Press S ta rt/stop.
Distance
Display of miles / k ilom etres travelled. The measurement can b e reset at any tim e and restarted, see "Reset".
Re set: Res et trip computer information
Range
The follow ing trip computer information can be rest (reset a nd restart measurements or calcula tions): z z z z Average consumption, Effective consumption, Average speed, Distanc e travelled.
11:25}
Range
21.5C
Select the desired trip computer information. Reset b y pressing the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel or the OK button on the Infota inment system.
Interruption of powe r s upply
257miles
If the power supp ly has been interrupted or if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost.
95
Graphical Information Display 3 or colour Information Display 3 Selecting functions
Se lection using four-way buttons
To s ele ct using the multi-function knob
FM AS
[TP]
REG
C Din
MP3
90.6 MHz
19,5
19: 36
Select menu items via menus a nd using the buttons on the Infotainment system. OK button Select highlighted point, c onfirm command. To exit a menu, press the right or left a rrow button to execute Return or M ain.
The functions and settings of some equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the Graphical Information Displa y or the Colour Information Display . These functions are selected or ex ecuted in the m enus on the display using the arrow buttons 3 on the Infotainment sy stem, the multi-function knob 3 on the Infotainment system or the left ad juster w heel 3 on the steering wheel. If check control warning messages 3 are displayed, the disp la y is locked for other displays. C onfirm w arning m essa ge. If there is more tha n one warning message, confirm them one after the other.
Turn Highlighting menu options or commands, selection of function areas, Press S elec t hig hlight, c onfirm com mands. To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion knob left or right to Return or Mai n and select.
96
Function areas System settings
Sele ction using the left adjuste r wheel 3 on the steering wheel:
7
FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3
Settings
19,5 19:36 19:36
Time, Date Language
90.6 MHz
Units Contrast Day / Night
25 . 10 . 2006
19,5
19: 36
Ign. logic
Turn up previous menu item, Turn down nex t menu item, Press select highlight, confirm c om mands.
For each functional area there is a main page (Main), which is selected at the top edge of the d isplay (not with the Infotainment sy stem CD 30 without the ha nds-free mobile phone system): z z z z Audio, Na vigation 3, Telephone 3 , Trip comp uter 3.
The settings are accessed via the Setting s menu. Press the Ma in button 3 (not found on all Infotainment sy stems) on the Infotainm ent system (c all up main display). Press the S ett ings button on the Infotainment system. For I nfotainment system CD 30, no menu m ay b e selected. The Settings m enu is displa yed.
For Audio, Nav ig ation 3 and Telephone 3 functions see Infotainment sy stem instructions.
Setting date and time 3
To correct tim e with the help of RDS, select menu item Synchron. clock autom atica l. from the Time, Da te menu.
19,5 19:36 19:36
97
Time, Date Time
The box in front of Synchron. clock automat ical. will be ticked; see Fig. 17340 T.
13 Languages Deutsch English Espaol Nederlands
19,5 19:36
Language selection
Date
25 . 10 . 2006
Synchron. clock automatical.
F ranais Settings 19,5 19:36 Italiano
Time, Date Language Deutsch English Espaol ...
Select menu item Time, Dat e, from the Setti ng s menu. The m enu for Time, Date is displayed. Select the menu items required: Make the desired setting. Corr ect ing tim e 3 In systems with GPS receiver 1 ), da te and time are set automatically upon receipt of a GPS satellite sig nal. If the displayed time does not ma tc h loca l time, it can be corrected ma nually or autom atically by receiving an RDS time sig nal2 ) 3 . Some RDS transm itters do not send c orrect time sig nals. I f the incorrect time is displayed often, d eactiva te automatic time sy nchronisation 3 and set the time manually.
1) 2)
Units Contrast Day / Night Ign. logic
S elec tions are indic ated b y a 6 in front of the menu item. In system s w ith v oic e output 3, when the language setting of the display is changed the sy stem will ask w hether the announcement lang uag e should also b e changed see Infotainment system instructions.
You can select the d isplay language for some func tions. Select menu item Lang ua ge from the Settings m enu. The ava ilab le languages are d isplay ed. Select the desired la nguag e.
GPS = G lob al P ositioning System, Satellite

system for glob al p osition ing . RDS = Ra dio D a ta System.
98
Adjusting contrast 3 (Graphical Information Dis play)
Alw ays nig ht design: white or coloured text on dark background. S elec tions are indic ated b y a o in front of the menu item.
Settings 19,5 19:36
Setting units of measure
Time, Date Language Units Contrast Day / Night Ign. logic Europe-SI Japan Great Britain USA
Contrast
19,5 19:36
Ignition logic 3
S ee Infotainment sy stem instructions.
12
Graphical Information Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3, trip computer 3
You ca n select w hich units of measure a re to be used. Select menu item Units from the Settings menu. The a vailable units are disp la yed . Select the desired unit. Selections are indicated by a o in front of the m enu item . Select menu item C ontrast from the Settings m enu. The menu for C ontrast is displayed. Confirm the required setting.
BC 1 BC 2
Board Computer
Timer Tyres
1 8
257.0 40
miles mph gals mpg
Se tting display mode 3
The display can b e adjusted to suit the light conditions, b la ck or coloured text on a light background or white or coloured text on a dark bac kground. Select menu item Da y / Nig ht from the Settings m enu. The options are displayed. Automat ic: ad apted based on v ehicle lig hting. Always day d esig n: black or coloured text on light b ackground .
7.0 31.0
The trip comp uters provide informa tion on driving da ta , which is continually recorded and evaluated electronica lly . The main trip computer page provides inform ation on range, instanta neous consum ption and a verage c onsumption 3. To display other trip computer data, press the BC button on the I nfotainment system 3, select the trip computer m enu front the display or press the left a djuster wheel 3 on the steering w heel.
Range
If the fuel in the tank will a llow less than 30 miles (50 km) of trav el, the message "Range" appears in the display. If the fuel in the tank will a llow less than 20 miles (30 km) of trav el, the message "Please refuel!" 3 app ears in the display . Ac know ledge the m enu item as described on p age 95.
99
Rese t: Reset trip compute r inform ation
BC 1 BC 2
Board Computer
Range Inst. Consumpt. Aver. Consump.

19,5 23 5
257 miles 31 mpg 31 mpg

Eco
Instantaneous consumption
19: 36
Timer Tyres
1 8
Display changes depending on speed: Display in gal/h Display in mpg below 8 mph (13 k m/h), above 8 mph (13 k m/h).
257.0 40
miles mph gals mpg
7.0 31.0
Range is calculated from current fuel tank content and instanta neous consumption. The d isplay shows average values. After refuelling, the v ehicle up dates the range autom atically after a brief delay .
Distance
Display of miles / kilometres travelled. The measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset".
The following trip com puter inform ation can b e reset (restart measurements): z z z z Distance Average speed Effective consum ption Average consum ption
Ave rage spe ed
Calculation of avera ge speed. The measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". Stoppages in the journey with the ignition off are not includ ed in the calculations.
S elec t BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer menu.
Range
3 3m iles
Effe ctive cons umption
Display of fuel used. The measurem ent can be reset at a ny time and restarted , see "Reset" .
OK
Ave rage consumption
Calculation of avera ge c onsumption. The measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset".
100
Stop watch
Reset BC 1
All values
19,5 19:36
Reset BC 1
All values
19,5 19:36
Board Computer
BC 1
m iles m ph gals m pg
19,5 19:36
257.0 40 7.0 31.0
m iles m ph gals m pg
257.0 40
BC 2 Timer Tyres
00:00:00
Start Reset Options
7.0 31.0
The information of the two trip c om puters can be reset separately , mak ing it possible to evaluate d ata from different tim e periods. Select the desired trip computer inform ation. The v alue for the selected function will b e reset and reca lculated.
To reset all information of a trip computer, select m enu item All v alues. After resetting, " - - -" is d isplay ed with the trip computer information selected. The recalculated values are displayed a fter a short time.
S elec t menu item Timer from the Board C omputer m enu. The Ti mer menu is display ed. To start, select menu item S tart. To reset, select menu item Reset. The relev ant stop w atch disp lay can b e selected in menu O ptions 3.
Inte rruption of power supply
If the power supply has been interrup ted or if the battery voltage has dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer will be lost.
Driving Tim e ex cl. Stops Driving Tim e incl. Stops
The tim e the vehicle is in motion is record ed. Stationary time is not included. The tim e the vehicle is in motion is record ed. The time the v ehicle is stationary with the key in the starter switch is included.
Measurement of the tim e from m anua l activation v ia S tart to manual deactiva tion via Reset.
101
Travel Tim e
Warning messages appea r on the display . If there are sev eral warning messages, they are d isplay ed one after the other. Some of the warning messages ap pear on the display in a n abbrev iated form. Exa mples of warning messages for the Gra phic al Inform ation Display 3 and Colour Information Display 3 are shown. On the Board Inform ation Display , messages appear in an abb reviated form. Ac know ledge warning messages as described on pages 91, 95. Una cknowledged warning messages can be re-displayed later. Warning messages: Remote C ontrol Bat ter y check
Display of current tyre pressure 3
Coolant level
ch eck
Board Computer
OK If there is a fault in the vehicle lig hting, the respective location of the fault is displayed as text, e.g.: Brakelig ht chec k rig ht In v ehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem 3 , if tyre pressure is too low, the display indica tes which tyre to check, e. g.: Tyre pressure chec k rear right (v alue in bar ) C heck ty re pressure a t next opp ortunity using suitable gauge. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3 see page 155. C hecking ty re pressure see pages 160, 220.
Select menu item Tyres from the Boa rd Com puter menu. The c urrent pressure of each ty re is displayed. Further information see pa ge 155.
Battery volta ge of remote control or electronic k ey of Open&S tart sy stem 3 too low see pages 33,36. Brak elight swi tch check Fault. Brak e light not coming on under braking. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified im med iately by a workshop. Sa fegua rd check Fault. S ystem fa ult in Vauxhall alarm sy stem. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified im med iately by a workshop.
Check control 3
Check control monitors some fluid levels, the ty re pressure 3, battery of the remote control, the Vauxhall alarm sy stem 3, the brake light switch and important exterior lights, inc luding cable and fuses. In trailer mode, the trailer lig hting is also m onitored .
102
In vehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 , if there is major loss of pressure in a ty re, the display indicates the tyre at fault, e.g.: Attention! Rea r left tyre pressure loss (v alue in bar) Stop im med ia tely a nd check tyres and pressures. Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 see page 155. Wa sher Fluid Level check Fluid level in windscreen wash system too low. Topping up wash fluid see page 207. Coolant l ev el check Fluid level in engine cooling sy stem is low. Check coolant level see page 204.
Warning buzzers
When start ing the eng ine or whilst drivi ng: z if the elec tronic k ey of the O pen&Start system is not present or unrecognised 3, z if drivers seat belt is not fastened 3, z if the d oors or the tailgate have not been properly closed when starting-off, z once you hav e reached a certain speed if the handb ra ke is ap plied 3, z if a d efined maximum speed is exceeded 3, z with Easytronic 3, if the engine is running A, M or R with footbrake not applied a nd drivers door has been opened . When the vehicle is pa rked and the drivers d oor is opened: z when the key is in the starter switch, z with parking lig hts or dipped beam on, z with the Open&S tart sy stem 3 and automatic transmission if the selector lever is not in P. z with Easy tronic 3 if the hand brake is not applied and no gear is engag ed when the engine is off.
Windscreen wiper
To switch on, press stalk lightly upwards. $ % & = = = = O ff Adjustab le timed interva l wipe Slow Fast
Interruption of power supply
Stored warning messages a ppear on the display one after the other.
S ta lk alway s m oves back to sta rting position. Shift to next higher or lower level: mov e stalk slightly. Push stalk p ast resistance point and hold : the wind screen wiper stages are run throug h; an acoustic signal sound s a t position . Press stalk down from position : S ingle swipe.
Adjustable wipe r interval 3 Automatic wiping w ith rain sensor 3 Windscreen wash sys tem and headlight wash system 3
103
To set the wiper interval to a v alue between 2 and 15 seconds: Switch on ignition, stalk down from position , wait until wiping freq uency reaches the desired interval tim e, stalk to timed interval wipe $. The interv al time selected remains stored until it is next changed or the ig nition is turned off. After turning on the ignition and setting the stalk to $ , the interva l is set to 6 seconds.
To switch on, p ress stalk lightly up wards. $ = = Automatic wiping with rain sensor Off To operate, pull stalk tow ards steering wheel. The wiper swipes for a few strokes. At low speeds, there is a sing le post-wash swipe. The headlight wash system 3 can be operated w hen the lights are on. Wash fluid is sp ra yed on the hea dlights once only. Then the hea dlight wash sy stem cannot be operated for 2 minutes. O n vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep the sensor area clean.
The rain sensor d etects the amount of water on the windscreen and a utoma tica lly regulates the windscreen wiper. Keep the rain sensor field clea r of dirt by op erating the wind screen wash system regularly.
104
Rear window wiper and wash system
To switch on, press stalk forw ards. The rear window wiper swipes in timed interval mode. The rear window wiper eng ages automatically when the w indscreen wiper is sw itched on and reverse gear is enga ged. To switch off, press stalk forwa rd s a gain. If the stalk is held forwards, the rea r screen wash system switches on for the period of activation.
Lightin g
105
Lighting
Ex terior lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Main beam, headlight flash . .... .... ..... . Autom atic d ipped beam activation 3 Turn signals. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Front fog lights > 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fog tail light r .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Reversing lights.... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Haza rd warning lights.. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Headlight range adjustment ? .... ..... . Adaptive Forw ard Lighting (AFL) 3 . . Door-to-door lighting 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . Parking lights 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Instrument illum ination Informa tion display illum ination ..... . Courtesy lig ht .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Puddle lig ht 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Battery discharge p rotection.... .... ..... . Light covers. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Headlights w hen driving abroad . ..... . 105 105 106 106 106 107 107 107 107 108 108 109 109 109 110 110 111 111
Exterior lights
Follow the regula tions of the country in which you are driving w hen using da ytime running lig hts and front fog lights 3. Driving in foreign c ountries see p age 111.
Main beam, headlight flash
Turn light switch: 7 8 9 = = = Off Park ing lights Dip ped beam or main bea m
In positions 8 a nd 9, the tail lights and numb er plate lights are also lit. Control indica tor 8 see page 85. If the ignition is switched off with the dipped bea m or main b eam on, the parking lights illuminate. Versions with daytime running lights 3: Pa rk ing lights are on when the ignition is switched on and the lig ht switch is set to 7 or AUTO . Dipp ed beam is on when the engine is running. The daytime running lights switch off when the ignition is switched off.
To switch from dipped to main beam , p ress stalk forwards and hold. To switch to dipped beam, press stalk forwards again or pull towards steering wheel. To activa te the headlight flash, pull sta lk towards steering wheel. The m ain beam is switched on w hile activated. The blue control indicator C is illum inated when main beam or hea dlight fla sh is on.
106
Ligh ting
Automatic dipped beam activation 3
Turn signals
Front fog lights > 3
To switch on, p ress stalk up or down. Light sw itc h to AUTO: Dipped beam comes on automatically w hen the engine is running if outsid e light conditions w arra nt suc h. The exterior lights switch off w hen the ignition is switched off. For reasons of safety, the light switch should alway s remain in the A UTO position. Stalk up Stalk down = Right turn signal light = Left turn signal light
The front fog lights can only be switched on when both the ignition and lights a re on. On O ff = = Press >, > illuminates in the instrum ent cluster Press > aga in or switch off ig nition or light
After operation, the turn signal stalk returns to its sta rting p osition. If the stalk is moved pa st the resistance point, the turn signal lig ht remains on. When the steering wheel moves ba ck tow ards the straig ht-ahead position, the turn signal light is autom atically deactiv ated. Ta p signa l: Move sta lk to resista nce point and release to activ ate three flashes from the turn signals when c ha nging lanes or the lik e. Move the stalk to the resistance point and hold for the turn signals to flash longer. Switch the turn signal off manually by moving the stalk slightly.
Lightin g
107
Fog tail light r
Hazard warning lights
Headlight range adjustment ?

Manual headlight range adjustment 3
The fog ta il light can only be sw itc hed on both the ignition and dipp ed b eam/ parking lights are on. On O ff = = Press >, > illuminates in the instrument cluster Press > again or switch off ignition or light
To switch on, p ress b utton . To switch off, press button a gain. To aid location of the pushb utton, the red surface is illuminated with the ignition switched on. When the button is pressed, its control indicator flashes in time with the ha zard warning lights. The hazard warning lig hts illuminate autom atic ally when the airbag is triggered, and also the central loc king unlocks all doors. S witch off ha zard warning lights using button . With dipped beam switched on, push to release knob and ad just headlight range in four steps to suit v ehicle load . Turn wheel aga inst resista nce and clic k it to the required position. C orrect adjustm ent of the headlight range reduc es dazz le for other road users. Automatic level control system 3 see page 153. Vehicles without l ev el control system 0 = Front seats occupied 1 = All seats occupied 2 = All seats occupied and luggage compartment load 3 = Drivers sea t occupied and luggage compartment load
The v ehicle fog tail light are deactiv ated when towing.
Reversing lights
Com e on when reverse gear is engaged and ignition is switched on.
108
Ligh ting
Curve lighting
The Xenon light bea m pivots based on steering wheel position a nd speed (from approx. 6 m ph (10 km /h)). The head lig hts shine at an a ngle of up to 15 to the right or left of the direction of tra vel. If the curve lig hting swivelling dev ice fails, the relev ant dipped beam is switched off. The corresp onding fog light is automatically switched on for reasons of safety. S eek the a ssistance of a workshop. If the control indicator B flashes for app rox . 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the hea dlights have been set to symm etrical dipp ed b eam; see "H eadlights when driv ing abroad" on pag e 111.
Vehi cles w ith level cont rol system 0 = Front seats occupied 1 = All seats occupied 1 = All seats occupied a nd lug gage compartment loa d 2 = Driv ers seat oc cup ied and lug gage compartment loa d
Autom atic headlight range adjustm ent 3
Motorway lighting
In vehicles with Xenon headlights the head lig ht ra nge is automatically a djusted depending on the vehicle load.
At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead trav el, the dipped beam autom atic ally raises slightly , thereby increasing headlight range.
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3
Control indicator B for Adaptive Forward Lighting
Door-to-door lighting 3
AFL im prov es lighting in curv es (curve lighting ) on vehicles with Bi-Xenon head lig ht system .
Illum inated: Fault in system. The system is not ready for operation.
Dipped beam a nd reversing lights 3 illuminate for around 30 seconds after the driver ex its the v ehicle and closes his door.
To activate
1. Switch off ignition. 2. Remov e ignition key 3.
Lightin g
3. Open driver s d oor. 4. Pull turn sig nal stalk tow ards steering wheel. 5. Close drivers door. If the driver s d oor is not closed the lights go off after tw o minutes. The light is immediately switched off when the k ey is p laced in the ignition or the turn signa l stalk is moved back to the steering wheel when the drivers door is opened. An acoustic signal sounds and control indica tor O illuminates briefly in the instrument cluster to indicate activation. To switch it off, switch on the ig nition or move the turn signal stalk in the opposite direction.
109
Courtesy light
Instrument illumination Information display illumination
Parking lights 3
Automatic interior light
C om es on automatically when the v ehicle is unlocked with the remote control, when a door is opened or when the key is removed from the starter sw itch a fter the ignition is switched off. Automatically switches off after a dela y after closing the doors and immediately when the ignition is switched on or after locking the doors.
Lights come on when ignition is switched on. The front p arking lig ht and tail light of one side of the vehicle can be activ ated w hen parking: 1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3, 2. Ignition off, 3. Move turn signal sta lk all the way up (right parking light) or down (left parking lig ht). Brig htness can be adjusted when the exterior lights are on: Push to release knob k and then turn it clockwise or anticlock wise and hold until the desired brightness is obtained. Display mode 3 see page 98.
Front courte sy light

On O ff = =
Manual operation from the inside with closed doors: Press button c Press button c ag ain
110
Ligh ting
Centre switch position: the centre and rear courtesy lights com e on together with the front courtesy light. Rear reading lights on left and right indiv idua lly opera ble with ignition switched on: On Off = = Switch position I Switch position 0
Front reading lights 3
Entry lighting 3
After unlocking the v ehicle, the instrument and switch lighting come on for a few seconds.
Door handle lighting 3
When the ex terior lights are on, the interior front door hand les are illuminated.
Illuminated mirrors in the sunvisors 3

The lig hting switches on when the cover is opened.
Courtesy lights and reading lights in the centre 3
Glove compartm ent lighting

C om es on when lid is open.
Reading lights on left and right ind iv idually opera ble with ignition turned on: On O ff = = Press button
Cigarette lighte r and ashtray illumination 3
C om es on when ignition is switched on.
a Press button a aga in
Luggage compartment lighting
C om es on when the boot lid/tailga te is opened.
Courtes y lights and reading lights in the ce ntre and the re ar 3
Automatically regulated centre console lighting 3

S pot light in internal mirror housing. Day lig ht-dependent, automatically regula ted centre console lighting with ignition switched on.
The courtesy lights come on tog ether with the front interior lig hts. To deactiv ate the courtesy lights, press 3 button c . The rear right a nd left reading lights c an be switched on separately with the ignition switched on: On Off = = Press button Press button
Puddle light 3
After unlocking the vehicle, the number plate lights come on for a few sec onds.
Battery discharge protection
a a again
To prevent the battery from becoming discharged , the c ourtesy light, reading lights, luggage compartment lighting and
Lightin g
glove compartment lighting switch off automatically 10 m inutes after the ignition is sw itched off.
111
Vehicles with Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL )

2. Sw itch on ignition.
Light covers
1. Pull and hold stalk for main beam on steering wheel (headlight flash) 3. After ap prox . 3 seconds, an a coustic signal sounds and then AFL control indicator B flashes approx. 4 seconds. After the switch, AFL control indicator B flashes for 4 sec onds each time the ignition is switched on. To return to asy mmetrica l dipped beam, pull and hold the m ain beam sta lk again, switch on the ignition and w ait for the acoustic signal. AFL control indica tor B will then discontinue flashing . Control indica tor B see pa ge 108.
The inside of the light covers m ay mist up briefly in poor, wet and cold weather conditions, in heavy ra in or after washing . The m ist d isappears quickly b y itself; to help, sw itc h on the lights.
Headlights when driving abroad

The a sym metrical dipped bea m extends visibility at the ed ge of the road at the passengers side.
This causes glare for oncom ing traffic if the vehic le is driven in countries where traffic drives on the opposite side of the road. Do as follow s to p revent glare:
Ve hicles with haloge n headlight system or X enon headlight sys tem 3

Hav e the headlights adjusted by a workshop.
112
In fotain men t System
Infotainment System
Radio reception 3
Vehicle radio reception differs from domestic radio reception: As the v ehicle antenna is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting compa nies cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of reception a s obtained with a d om estic ra dio using an ov erhead antenna. z C hanges in distance from the transm itter, z multi-path rec eption due to reflection and z sha dowing may cause static, noise, distortion or loss of reception a ltogether.
Further information see page 96 and the relevant operating instructions.
Twin Audio 3
Radio reception 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Remote control on steering wheel 3 . . Twin Audio 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . AUX input 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Mobile telephones a nd radio eq uipm ent 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Infotainm ent system 3 . .... ..... .... .... ..... .
112 112 112 113 113 113
Remote control on steering wheel 3
Twin Audio provides rear seat oc cup ants with the opportunity to listen to a d ifferent audio sourc e than the one selec ted b y the driver on the I nfotainment system . O nly an audio sourc e that is not currently active on the ra dio sy stem can b e controlled using Twin Aud io. Two headphone connections are ava ila ble, with sepa ra te volume controls. Further information is availab le in the Infotainment system operating instructions.
The func tions of the Infotainment sy stem 3 a nd the inform ation display can be operated on the steering wheel.
Infotainment System
113
AUX input 3
Recomm ended prerequisites for fault-free op eration: z Professionally insta lled exterior antenna to obtain the maximum rang e possib le, z Max imum transm ission power 10 Watt, z Installation of the telephone in a suitable spot (see information on page 75). Obtain ad vice on p redetermined installation loc ations for the external antenna and equipment holder and way s of using dev ices w ith transmission power of more than 10 Wa tts. We recom mend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will have brack ets and various installation k its av ailable as accessories and will install them in accordance with regulations. Operation of a hands-free attachment with no outside a ntenna using the mobile telep hone standards GS M 900/1800/1900 and UMTS may ta ke p lace only if the maximum transmission power of the mobile telephone does not ex ceed 2 W in the case of GSM 900 a nd otherwise 1 W. The opera ting instruc tions of the manufac turer of the telep hone and hand sfree attachment must be noted in all cases.
For reasons of safety, we recommend that y ou d o not use the phone whilst driving. Even use of a hands-free set can be a distraction whilst driving. Be sure to observe any country-spec ific regulations.
9 Warn ing
Mobile telephones and rad io equipment may lead to malfunctions in the vehicle electronics when operated inside the vehicle with no ex terior aerial, unless the current regulations a re observed. Operate ra dio equipment and mobile telephones w hich fail to m eet current mobile telephone standards only using an antenna located outside of the vehicle.
The AUX input is located in the centre console, in front of the handbrake. An ex ternal audio source, such as a portable CD p la yer, can be connected via the AUX input. Always keep the AUX input clean and dry. Further information is available in the I nfotainment system operating instructions.
Infotainment system 3
The Infotainment sy stem is operated as desc ribed in the operating instructions.
Mobile telephones and radio equipment 3
The Vauxhall installa tion instructions and the operating guidelines p rov id ed by the telephone manufa cturer m ust be observed when fitting and operating a m ob ile telephone. Failure to d o so could invalida te the v ehicle s op erating permit (EU Directive 95/54/EG).
114
Climate Control
Climate Control
Heating and ventila tion system, air cond itioning system 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 Electronic Climate Control (EC C) 3 ... . Air vents .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Heated rear window, heated ex terior mirrors 3 ... .... .... ..... . Heated front seats 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Cooled glove compartment 3 .. .... ..... . Heating and ventila tion system ... ..... . Air conditioning system 3 ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 Electronic Climate Control (EC C) 3 ... . Air intake . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Pollen filter .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Note .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Maintenance ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Heating and ventilation system, air conditioning system 3
114 114 115 115 116 116 117 117 119 121 125 130 130 130 130
Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re combined into one unit that is d esigned to prov ide com fort regardless of the season, weather or outside temperature. When cooling 3 is activated, the air is cooled and dried. The heating unit hea ts the air as required in all operating m od es depending on the position of the tempera ture rotary knob. The air supply ca n be adjusted to suit requirements by means of the fan.
Buttons for cooling n and the air recirc ulation system 4 a re only present in the version w ith air c onditioning sy stem 3 . Air conditioning system 3 see page 119.
Automatic air conditioning system 3
Climate Control
Provides a comfortab le clima te in the interior of the v ehicle in any weather conditions, a t any outside temperature and at any time of year. The temperature and the quantity of inflowing air are controlled autom atically by preselecting an interior tem perature using the tem perature regulator. A consistent, p leasant climate is therefore automatically created inside the vehicle, depending on the external climatic conditions. Autom atic air conditioning sy stem see page 121. In order to ensure that a consistent and pleasant climate is provided in the vehicle, the tem perature of the inflow ing air, the quantity of air and the air distribution are autom atic ally ada pted to the ex ternal climatic conditions and the specified interior temperature. The settings are show n on the information display . Elec tronic automatic air cond itioning sy stem see pa ge 125.
115
O pen a ir vent: rotate horiz ontal a djuster wheel to I . Direc t the flow of air by tilting and swivelling the slats. To close the air vent, rotate a djuster wheel to 0.
Top and centre air vents in the instrument panel
Air vents
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3
Pleasant ventilation in the interior is controlled by the position of the temperature rotary k nob. To increase the air sup ply, turn the fan to a higher lev el and set the air d istribution rotary knob to M or L .
Centre air vents in the instrume nt panel

O pen a ir vent and adjust direction of airflow: align slats. To close the sla ts, direct air v ents downwards. C om fort recommendation: directing the flow of air with the slats in an upright position p rov id es optimum v entilation for the occupants in the second and third rows of seats and also efficiently distributes the hea ted or cooled air throug hout the interior of the vehicle.
Provides ma ximum com fort inside the vehic le, irrespective of the external conditions.
116
Climate Control
Side air vents in the ins trume nt panel and rear air vents in the console between the front seats
Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors 3
Heated front seats 3
O peration with ignition switched on: O pen air v ent: rotate vertical adjuster wheel to I . Direct the flow of air by tilting and swivelling the slats. To close the air vent, rota te ad juster wheel to 0. With the ignition on, the rear screen and exterior mirror heating is sw itched on by pressing b utton : LED illuminates: rear screen and ex terior mirror heating. LED does not illuminate: rear screen and exterior mirror heating is sw itched off. Heating works with the engine running a nd is switched off a utoma tica lly after around 15 minutes. Depend ing on the engine, the heated rear wind ow comes on automatically when the diesel p artic le filter is being clea ned 3 . Press button one or more times to set the desired hea t output. The control indica tor in the button indicates which of the three hea ting levels is ac tiv e. We do not recomm end prolonged use of the highest level for people with sensitive skin. Deactivation: Press button repeatedly until the control indicator goes out. S eat heating is operationa l when the eng ine is running.
Additional air ve nts
Loc ated below the windscreen a nd door windows and in the footwell.
Climate Control
117
Cooled glove compartment 3
Heating and ventilation system

Air distribution
Temperature
Cooled air is fed into the glove compartment through a noz zle. If glove compa rtm ent cooling is not req uired, mov e slider to the front.
Set using left-hand rotary knob L M l J K for head area v ia adjusta ble a ir vents, for footwell for head area v ia adjusta ble a ir vents for windscreen a nd front door windows for windscreen, front door windows, footw ell for footwell
S et using centre rotary knob Red area Blue area = = warm cold
Intermediate settings are possible. Open the air vents when the rotary knob is set to L or M.
118
Airflow
Climate Control
Ventilation Heating
The amount of heat is dep endent on the coolant tem perature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm. For rapid warm ing of the passenger compa rtm ent: z Set air distribution rotary knob to the desired position, preferably position J see page 117, z Turn the temp erature rotary knob clockwise as far as it w ill go, z Switch on fan stage 3, z Open all air v ents. Vehicles with Q uickheat 3: Depending on external temperature and eng ine tem perature, the pa ssenger compa rtm ent is heated more quickly w ith electric aux iliary heating. The electrical auxiliary heating switches on automatically. The c om fort and general well-being of the vehicle occupants are to a large extent dependent on a suitab le v entilation a nd hea ting setting. To achieve a stra tification of tem perature with the pleasant effec t of "cool head and warm feet", turn the rotary knob for air distribution to K or J, set temp erature rotary k nob to any position (in the midrange with stratification of tem perature).
Set using right-hand rotary k nob Four fan speeds: x 4 Off Maxim um rate of a irflow
z For maxim um ventilation in the head area: mov e air d istribution rotary knob to M, open all air vents, move sla ts of top and centre air vents to an upright position see page 115, z Set the temperature to the desired setting, z Sw itch on fan, adjust fan ac cord ing to req uirements, z For ventilation to footwell: set air distribution rotary k nob to K, z For simultaneous ventilation to the head area a nd the footwell: set air distribution rotary k nob to L.
The rate of airflow is determined by the fan. The fa n should therefore also be switched on during a journey .
Climate Control
Heating the footwe ll Dem isting and de frosting the windows
z For simultaneous warming of the footwell, set a ir distribution rotary knob to J.
119
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions can lead to window fogging or icing and therefore accidents due to lack of visib ility .
Air conditioning system 3
As well as the effect of the heating and cooling system , the a ir conditioning system also cools and dries the inflowing air. If no cooling or drying is required, switch the cooling system off to sav e fuel. At low outsid e temperatures the cooling unit sw itc hes off a utomatica lly .
Cooling n
z Set air distribution rota ry knob to K , z Temperature rotary k nob in rig ht z one, z Switch on fan.
Window fogging or icing, e. g. in dam p weather, because of wet clothing or due to low outside temp eratures. z Move air distribution rotary knob to l . z Turn the temperature rota ry knob clockwise as far as it will go (warm). z Set fan to 3 or 4. z Sw itch on heated rear window . z O pen side air vents as required and direct them towa rd s d oor w indows. O perate only with the engine running and the fa n on: On = Press n O ff = Press n ag ain C ontrol indicator in button.
120
Climate Control
Convenience settings Maxim um cooling
Air re circulation system 4
The a ir recirculation button 4 is used to set the ventilation system to air recirculation mode (control indicator illuminates in button). If fumes or unpleasant odours penetra te from outside: temporarily switch on air recirculation system 4. To increase the cooling power at high outside tem peratures, temporarily switch on the air recirculation system . The a ir recirculation sy stem minimises the entry of outside air. The humidity increases, and the windows can m ist up. The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates which ma y cause the vehic le occupants to feel drowsy. Air distrib ution to l: the air recircula tion system is automatically switched off to speed up window demisting and av oid fogging.
z Set cooling n as desired. z Air circulation sy stem 4 off. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M or L. z Set temperature rota ry knob to desired position. z Sw itch on fan a t desired speed . z O pen or align a ir vents as required. Temperature rotary k nob in centre of adjustment range: warmer air will flow into the footwell and cooler air into the upper zone, with warm er air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the centre air vents.
Briefly open the window so tha t warm a ir can d issipate quic kly. z Cooling n on. z Air circulation system 4 on. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M. z Turn the temp erature rotary knob antic lock wise as far as it will go (c old). z Set fa n to 4. z Open all air v ents.
Climate Control
Demis ting and defrosting the windows
z O pen side air vents as required and direct them towa rd s d oor w indows. z Sw itch on heated rear window . z O pen side air vents as required and direct them towa rd s d oor w indows.
121
Automatic mode
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions can lead to w indow fogg ing or ic ing and therefore accidents due to lack of visibility.
Automatic air conditioning system 3
It provides consistent comfort in the interior of the vehicle in any weather conditions, at any outside tem perature and at any time of year. In order to ensure that the climate in the vehicle is consistent and pleasa nt, the temperature of the inflowing air and the quantity of air are autom atically ada pted to the external clima tic conditions. Temperature changes d ue to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are autom atic ally compensated.
Basic setting for max imum comfort: z Turn fan rotary knob to A, z Adjust air distribution rotary knob in accordance with requirem ents, see next colum n, z Preset temperature to 22 C using rotary knob (hig her or lower if required), z Air conditioning comp ressor activation see page 123, z Open all of the air vents in the front (and the rear air vents if required) 3 . S witc hing off the air conditioning compressor can have an a dverse effect on comfort and safety see pa ge 123.
Wind ow fogging or icing, e.g. in d amp weather, because of wet clothing or due to low outside temperatures. z Cooling n on, the air conditioning compressor automa tic ally switches off in low outd oor temperatures (ice formation), z Move a ir distribution rota ry knob to l . z Turn the temperature rotary k nob cloc kwise. z Set fan to 4.
122
Climate Control
Tempe rature pre sele ction Airflow
Air distribution
Set using left-ha nd rota ry knob L M l J K for hea d area via a djustable air v ents, for footwell for hea d area via a djustable air v ents for windscreen and front door w indows for w indscreen, front d oor windows, footwell for footwell
Set using centre rotary knob Move rotary knob to a v alue of between 17 C and 27 C. Intermediate setting s are possible. The preselected tem perature is k ept constant. For reasons of comfort, tem perature can only be chang ed in small increments. No tem perature control tak es place at a setting of less than 17 C (left-most position) or more than 27 C (right-most position), but the a ir cond itioning system op erates at maximum cooling or heating power.
S et using rig ht-hand rotary knob 1-4 A x Manual setting of the fan speed, intermediate settings are possible. Automatic control of fan speed Fan off
The fa n speed determines the a irflow that is needed to maintain the preselected temperature. S elec t autom atic mode for maxim um comfort. The air conditioning comp ressor is switched off when the fan is switched off.
Intermediate setting s a re possible. O pen the air v ents w hen the rotary knob is set to L or M.
Climate Control
Air conditioning compressor (cooling) n s witching on and off Manual air re circulation mode V entilation
123
O perate only with the engine running and the fan on: On O ff = = Press n Press n aga in
The air recirculation system prevents the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger compa rtm ent is circulated. Press button 4, control indicator in button. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates whic h may c ause the v ehicle occ upa nts to feel drow sy . In operation w ithout cooling the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactiv ate m anual air recirculation: Press button 4 ag ain. The control indica tor in the button will go out.
z For m aximum v entilation in head area: set air distrib ution rotary knob to M and open all a ir vents. z For v entilation to footwell: set air distribution rota ry knob to K . z For sim ultaneous ventilation to the head area and the footwell: set a ir distribution rotary knob to L . z Select required tempera ture. z Move fan rotary knob to A, fan can also be set manua lly if required: move rotary knob to position 1 - 4, interm ediate settings are also possible.
Control indicator in button. When cooling (AC comp ressor) is a ctive, air is cooled a nd dehumidified . If cooling or dehumid ification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to save fuel. At low outside tempera tures the cooling unit switches off automatically .
Heating
The amount of heat is dep endent on the coolant tem perature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm.
124
Climate Control
Max imum cooling for extre mely warm interior Demisting and defros ting windows
For ra pid warming of the passenger compartment: z Set the air distribution rotary knob to the desired p osition see page 117. z Set centre rotary knob to required temperature, recommend ed v alue approx. 22 C . z Set fan to A, fan can also be set manua lly if req uired: mov e rotary knob to position 1 - 4, intermediate settings are also possible. Vehicles with Q uic kheat 3 : Dep ending on external temperature and engine tem perature, the passenger compartment is heated more quickly with electric auxiliary heating. The electrical auxiliary heating sw itches on automatically. The com fort and general well-being of the vehic le occupants are to a large ex tent dependent on a suitable ventila tion and heating setting. To achiev e a stratification of temp erature with the pleasant effect of " cool head and warm feet" effect, move air distribution rotary knob to K or J, set tem perature rotary knob to approx. 22 C and open centre air vents.
9 Warn ing
Failure to follow the instruc tions can lead to wind ow fog ging or icing and therefore accidents due to lack of v isibility.
Briefly open the window so that warm air can dissipate quickly. z C ooling n on, z Set air distribution rotary knob to M, z Move tem perature rotary knob to req uired temperature value, z Move fan rotary k nob to A, z O pen all air vents. At settings below 17 C (rotary k nob all the way to the left), the sy stem c ontinually runs with maximum cooling. When the air conditioning compressor is running, the sy stem is autom atically set to air recirculation. Window fogging or icing, e.g. in damp weather, because of wet clothing or due to low outsid e tempera tures. z Cooling n on, z Press b utton V: in position A, fan autom atically switches to max imum speed , the a ir distribution is directed at the windscreen, z Set temperature to m aximum heating power, i.e. turn c entral rotary knob clockwise as far as possib le (28 C), z Switch on heated rear window .
Climate Control
Cooling operation (air c onditioning compressor) is not possib le at low outside tem peratures. To switch off, press button V again, and the a utoma tic air conditioning system opera tes at the previously selec ted setting .
FM AS [TP] REG C Din
125
MP3
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3
90.6
MHz
It provides maximum comfort in the interior of the vehicle in any weather cond itions, at any outside temperature and a t any time of year. To ensure a constant and com fortable climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of the inflowing air, the airflow rate a nd the air distrib ution are cha nged automatically according to clim atic conditions outside the v ehicle. The Electronic C lim ate C ontrol (ECC) automatically cools to the specified value with the m aximum cooling p ow er. Tem perature cha ng es due to externa l influences, such as direct sunlig ht, are automatically compensated. Data is show n on the informa tion display . Setting modifications are briefly shown in the information display, superim posed over the currently display ed menu. The display can vary ac cord ing to the type of presentation see p age 89. The settings in the Electronic Climate Control are stored in the vehicle key when the vehicle is locked, see "S tore personal settings in vehicle k ey" see pa ge 31. With va rious rem ote controls, stored settings are automatically retrieved by using the relev ant remote control. Manua l settings, e.g. operating w ithout cooling, and air distribution can be selected using the menu see page 126. When the cooling unit (a ir cond itioning compressor) is on, the air is cooled and dehumidified. The pollen filter removes d ust, soot, pollen and spores from the inflowing outside air. The autom atic air rec irculation system has an air quality sensor 3 to detect harmful gases in the outside air, in which case it will switch autom atically to air recirc ulation. When set to automa tic mode, the Electronic Clima te C ontrol provides the optimum settings for practically all conditions. If so desired, the Electronic C lim ate Control c an be manually adjusted. The Elec tronic C limate Control is only fully operational w hen the engine is running. At low outsid e temperatures the cooling unit (cooling com pressor) switches off automatically.
126
Climate Control
Automatic air re circulation mode 3
The ventilation system is set to air recirculation mode and interior air is recirculated. If a temp erature b elow 16 C is set, Lo app ears in the display : the Electronic C lim ate C ontrol runs constantly at ma ximum cooling power. The temperature is not regulated. If a temp erature a bove 28 C is set, Hi app ears in the display : the Electronic C lim ate C ontrol runs constantly at ma ximum heating power. The tem perature is not regulated.
Autom atic m ode
The autom atic air recirculation system ha s an air quality sensor to detect harmful gases in the outside air, in which case it w ill switch automatically to air rec irculation. If outside temp eratures are low and cooling (air c onditioning compressor) is switched off, automatic air recircula tion is only av ailable in a limited capacity so as to prevent the wind ow s from misting. Activate air recirculation manually if so desired. Basic setting for max imum comfort: z Press AUTO button, z Open all air vents, z Air conditioning compressor activation see pa ge 127, z Set preselected temperature to 22 C using left-hand rotary k nob. The temp erature can be set higher or low er as desired. Switching off the AC compressor (Eco appears in disp la y) can reduce com fort and affect sa fety see page 127. All air vents a re actuated automatically in automatic mode. The air vents should therefore alway s b e open see pag e 115. Switching autom atic air recirculation on or off see page 129. Manua l air recirculation mode see page 129.
Manual settings
Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc
Tempe rature pre sele ction
The left-hand rotary k nob can be used to set tem peratures between 16 C and 28 C. For reasons of comfort, tem perature can only be chang ed in small increments. Vehicles with Quickheat 3: Depend ing on externa l temp erature a nd engine temperature, the passenger compartment is heated more quickly with electric auxiliary heating. The elec trica l auxiliary heating switches on autom atic ally. Under certain circumstances (e.g. icy or misted windows), the func tions of the Electronic Climate Control can be adjusted ma nually. Electronic Clima te C ontrol settings can be changed via the centre knob, the buttons and the menus shown on the display. Press the centre knob to call up the m enu. The menu for manual Electronic Clima te C ontrol settings appears in the display.
Climate Control
Air distribut.
127
Dem isting and de frosting the windows
To return to automatic m ode: press button V or AUTO . Heated rear w indow see page 116.
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions can lead to window fogging or icing and therefore accidents due to lack of visib ility .
Switch air conditioning compres sor on and off

Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Air conditioning on / off
90.6 MHz
Individual m enu item s a re highlighted b y turning the centre knob and selected by pressing it. Selecting certain menus by pressing the knob will open a submenu 3. To ex it a m enu, turn the centre knob left or right to Return or Ma in and select. If no cooling or dehum idifica tion is required, switch the air conditioning compressor off (max imum energy sa vings): Highlight menu item A C from the manual settings menu and select b y pressing the knob. Eco appea rs on the display . Inflowing air is neither c ooled nor dehum idified. This restricts the lev el of comfort provided by the Electronic Clima te C ontrol. This may cause the windows to mist up, for exam ple. To activa te cooling: S elect menu item AC from the manual settings menu and p ress to a ctivate cooling.
Window fogging or icing, e. g. in dam p weather, because of wet clothing or due to low outside temp eratures. Press V button. V appears in display : Control indica tor in b utton illuminates. The tem perature and the a ir distribution are adjusted autom atically, the fan runs at a faster sp eed and the windows are rapidly cleared of ice and moisture. The airflow can be increa sed or decreased by turning the right-hand knob.
128
Climate Control
Airflow
Air distribution
Air distribut.
Fan control in automatic mode 3

Automatic blower Strong Normal Weak
90.6 MHz
Press the centre knob. The possible air distrib ution settings appear one after another in the display . Air distrib ution can also be set in the Air distrib ut. menu: Top Air distribution to wind screen and front door wind ow s. Centre Air distrib ution to vehicle occupants via controlla ble front air vents. Bottom Air distrib ution to footwell. Return to automatic a ir distribution: Dea ctivate corresp onding setting or p ress AUTO button.
Turn right-hand knob right or left. The selected fa n speed in indicated with x and the number in the display. At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air conditioning compressor) are switched off. To return to a utoma tic mode: Press A UTO button.
Fan regulation in automatic mode can b e modified. S elec t menu item Autom atic b lower from the manual settings m enu and select the desired fan control. Depending on the setting, the m aximum airflow, and thereby the noise level, will increa se.
Climate Control
Switching automatic air re circulation 3 on or off
Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Automatic recirculation air control at bad outside air
129
Manual air re circulation mode
Air conditioning with the engine not running
Residual air conditioning on
The automatic air recirc ulation sy stem has an air q uality sensor to detect ha rm ful gases in the outsid e air, in w hich case it will switch autom atically to air recirculation and the interior air is recirculated. Select menu item Auto. recir c from the manual settings menu a nd switch it on or off by p ressing the knob. Switch to m anua l air recirculation as necessary.
The air recirculation system minim ises the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger compa rtm ent is recirculated . Press button 4, the control indic ator in the button will illum ina te. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates whic h may c ause the v ehicle occ upa nts to feel drow sy . In operation w ithout cooling , the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactiv ate m anual air recirculation: Press button 4 ag ain. The control indica tor in the button will go out.
When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is off, the heat or cooling power still in the system can be used to condition the passenger compartment, for exa mple when stopped at a level crossing. Press AUTO b utton with the ig nition off. Residual air condi tioning on will ap pear briefly in the d isplay . The air conditioning will operate for a limited period of tim e. To cancel air conditioning, press the A UTO button.
130
Climate Control
Air intake
Note
If the windscreen mists up during d amp weather, tem pora rily set the sy stem as described under "Dem isting a nd defrosting the windows" see p ages 119, 121 and 127. Cooling 3 functions most efficiently when the windows are closed. If the passenger compartment has heated up considera bly after a long period in direct sunlight, briefly op en the wind ow s a nd sunroof 3 so tha t the hot air can esc ape quick ly. When cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is switched on condensation forms, which is expelled from the underside of the vehic le. At least one air vent must be open w hile cooling 3 (air conditioning com pressor) is on in order to prev ent the ev aporator from icing up due to lack of air m ov ement. At low outside temp eratures the c ooling unit switches off automatically. If you wish the Electronic Clima te Control (ECC ) 3 to operate correctly, d o not c ov er the sensor on the instrum ent panel.
Maintenance
In order to ensure continuously efficient performa nc e, the air conditioning compressor 3 must b e operated for a few minutes once a month, irrespectiv e of the weather and tim e of y ear. The Electronic C lim ate C ontrol (ECC ), if present, ha ndles this autom atically whilst driving. Air conditioning com pressor operation is not possible when outsid e temperatures are low. S eek the a ssistance of a workshop in the event of faults.
The air inta kes in front of the windsc reen in the engine com partment must be kept clear to allow air intake. Remove any lea ves, d irt or snow.
Pollen filter
The p ollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen and spores from the air entering from outside. The active carbon layer 3 elim inates most od ours and harmful amb ient gases from the air. Replace the pollen filter at the interv als given in the S ervice Booklet.
Driving an d Operation
131
Driving and Operation
Easytronic 3
Starting the engine
The semi-automatic Easytronic manual tra nsmission permits manua l (Manua l mode) or a utomatic gearshifting (Automatic m ode), b oth w ith a utomatic clutch c ontrol.
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life.
Transmission display
Ea sy tronic 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic transm ission 3 .... .... .... ..... . Driving hints .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sav ing fuel, protecting the environment . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuel consump tion, fuel, refuelling ..... . Ca ta lytic converter, exhaust g ases... . Drive Control System s .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Brake system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Anti-lock Brake Sy stem (ABS u ).. ..... . Wheels, ty res ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Roof racks 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Towing eq uipm ent 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca ra van / trailer towing ... ..... .... .... ..... . 131 136 141 143 144 146 148 157 159 159 164 164 167 When starting the eng ine, depress the footbrake at the same time. The engine ma y be started only when the footbrake is depressed. I n the transmission display , "N " is shown. If the footbrake is not depressed , the control indicator j 3 comes on in the instrument cluster, and at the same time "N " flashes in the transmission display . The eng ine cannot be started. S ta rting is not possible if all brak e lights fail. Shows the mode and current g ear. The display flashes for a few seconds when A, M or R is selected with the engine running and the footbrak e not activa ted. There is no need to select neutral before starting the eng ine. If a gea r is engaged, the transmission automatically switches to neutral (N ) before the engine sta rts when the footbrake is opera ted. This c an lead to a slight delay in the starting process.
132
Drivin g and Operation

Starting-off
In Automatic m od e, selection of other gears is a utoma tic irrespective of driving conditions.
Easytronic operation via the selector le ver
Move se lector le ve r towards A
S witc h between Automatic and Manua l mode. Manual gearshifting is possible in Manual mode. "M" and the currently engaged g ear app ear in the disp la y. If the engine speed is too low the Easy tronic will autom atically shift to a lower gear even in Manual m od e. This prev ents the eng ine from stalling . Depress the footbrake, release the ha ndb ra ke and move the selector lev er to A, + or -. Easytronic is in Automatic m ode and first gear is enga ged (sec ond gear if the Winter programm e is active). "A1" appea rs in the transmission display ("A2" if the Winter programm e is active). The vehic le begins to "creep" w hen the footbrake is released. It is also p ossible to start-off without depressing the footbrake if the a ccelerator pedal is op erated directly after moving the selector lever. If there is no im media te acceleration or the footbrake is not depressed , no gear is engaged and " A" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts back to d isplay ing "N ". Then repea t the previously d escribed start-off proc edure.
Move se lector le ve r towards + or -
Always mov e the selector lever in the appropriate direction as far as it will g o. Upon release, it autom atically returns to the c entre position. Pay heed to the gear / mode indica tor in the transmission d isplay .
Move selector leve r tow ards N

Neutra l.
+ -
Shifting to a higher g ear. Shifting to a lower gear.
If a higher gear is selected when the running speed is too low, or a lower g ear when the speed is too hig h, no shift is effected. This prevents the engine from running at too low or too high revs. Gears ca n be skipp ed b y moving the selector lever repea tedly at short interv als. If the vehicle is in Automatic mode, when the selector lev er is moved to + or Ea sy tronic shifts to Manual m od e and shifts up or down. The tra nsmission display shows "M" a nd the currently selected gea r.
133
Electronically controlled driving programmes
Winte r program me T
z By mea ns of delayed gear changing (higher eng ine speeds) following a cold start, the operating tem perature programm e in Automatic m od e quickly and a utomatica lly brings the cataly tic converter to the temperature required for optimum pollutant reduction. z Adaptive programm es automatically adap t gea rshifting in Automatic mode to suit the driving conditions, such as if the vehicle is towing a carava n / trailer, has a high payload, or is being d riv en on inclines. In the ev ent of difficulties starting-off on slippery roads, press button T ("A", currently engaged gear and T appear in the tra nsmission display). Easytronic switches to Autom atic mode and the vehicle starts-off in second g ear. The Winter prog ra mme is switched off by: z pressing b utton T again, z turning off the ignition. In order to protect the Ea sytronic, the Winter programme automatically switches itself off at extrem ely high clutch temperatures. z When SPO RT mode is engaged, shift times are reduced and the transmission shifts at higher engine speeds (unless cruise control is on). S PORT m od e see page 150. z Winter programm e: Press button T see nex t colum n. If the Winter programme is activated, S PO RT mode is deactivated. If the vehicle is sw itc hed to Manual m od e while the Winter programm e is active, the Winter prog ramme is interrupted. The Winter prog ra mme resumes upon return to Automatic mode.
Move selector leve r tow ards R
Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is stationary. Dep ress the footbra ke, release the handbrake and m ov e the selector lever to R. Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appea rs in the transmission display. The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the footb rake is released . It is also possible to sta rt-off in rev erse without depressing the footbrake if the accelerator peda l is operated directly after movement of the selec tor lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the footb rake is not depressed, no gear is enga ged and "R" fla shes. After several seconds the display reverts back to displaying "N ". Then repeat the previously described start-off p rocedure.
134

Engine braking
Automat ic mod e When driving downhill, Easytronic does not shift into higher gears until a fairly high engine speed has been reached . When braking, Easy tronic shifts d ow n in good tim e. Manual m ode To utilise the engine braking effect, select a low er gear in good time when driv ing downhill.
Kickdown
Manoeuvring the vehicle
"Rocking the vehicle"
Dep ressing the accelerator pedal past the pressure point: depending on the engine speed the tra nsmission shifts to a lower gear. Full engine p ow er is ava ilab le for accelerating. During k ic kdown no manual gea rshifting is possible. When the engine speed a pproaches its upper limit, the transmission shifts to a higher gear during kick down even in Manual mode. Without kick down this automatic shift is not effec ted in Ma nual m ode. If S PO RT mode is engag ed, the drive wheels may spin slightly when starting-off with kickd ow n. This allows for max imum acceleration of the v ehicle.
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, move the selector lever between R and A (or + or -) in a repeat pattern while app ly ing lig ht p ressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not rac e the engine and avoid sudden acceleration. This applies only to the exceptional circum stances mentioned a bove.
To ma noeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in ga ra ge entrances the creeping m ov ement can be utilised by releasing the footb ra ke. N ever actuate accelerator and brake pedals sim ultaneously. To prevent d amage, Easy tronic disengag es the " creep function" a t excessively high automatic clutch temperatures.
Stopping the ve hicle
In Automatic or Ma nual m ode, when the vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter mode eng aged, second gear) is engaged automatically and the c lutch released. In R, reverse rema ins eng aged.
If the engine is running, a gear has been selected a nd the footbrake has not been depressed, a warning buzzer goes off when the drivers door is opened. If the handbrake has not been applied the vehic le starts to creep. Move selector lev er to N and app ly handbrake. When stop ping on gradients, eng age the handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To prevent overheating of the clutch, do not increase engine speed to ensure smooth idling when in gear. To prevent dam age to the Easy tronic, the clutch is closed automatically at high clutch tem peratures. Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. If the handbrak e has not been ap plied, the control indicator R flashes for a few second s a fter the ignition is switched off. With the engine off a nd the handbrak e not applied, when the drivers door is opened a warning buzzer sounds and the control indica tor R flashes; switch on ignition, engage gear, switch off ignition and apply ha ndb ra ke.
135
Hav e the cause of the fa ult rectified b y a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the sy stem facilitates rapid rectification of faults.
Interruption of powe r s upply
Fault
Ve hicle storage
Before leav ing the vehicle: z engage handbrake, z remove the ignition key or, w ith the Open&S tart sy stem 3 , rem ov e the elec tronic key from the vehicle. The most recently engag ed gear (indicator in transmission d isplay ) remains engag ed. With N, no gear is engag ed. When the ig nition is sw itched off the Ea sy tronic no longer resp onds to movement of the selec tor lever. Loc k the v ehicle. O therwise the b attery may become discharged if the vehicle is parked for long periods. Control indica tor A illuminates in the event of a fault in the Easy tronic system. In the event of serious faults, "F" also appears in the transm ission display . It is possible to continue driving if only control indicator A illum inates. Manual mode can then no longer be selected. If "F" app ears in the transmission disp lay, continued driving is not possible.
The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle battery is d ischarged and a gea r has been selected. The vehicle c annot m ov e. If the battery is fla t, sta rt the vehicle using jump leads see pa ge 171. If the interruption of power sup ply is not due to the discharged battery , seek assistance from a workshop . If the vehicle has to be removed from the flow of traffic, release the clutch as follows: 1. Apply handbrake and switch off ignition. 2. Open and support the bonnet.
136
3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see Fig. 17178 T on the previous p age) so that no dirt can get into the opening when the c ap is remov ed. 4. Rotate cap to slac ken and remove by lifting upwards see Fig. 17178 T on the previous page. 5. Turn the adjusting screw clockw ise using a flat-hea d screw driver (vehicle tools 3 see pa ge 174) until clear resistance can be felt. The c lutch has now been diseng aged. Do not turn b eyond the resistance, since this can da mage the Easy tronic. 6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must b e in full contact with the housing . Towing the vehicle and starting the engine is not permitted when the clutch has been released in this way, although the vehic le can be mov ed a short distance. Seek the imm ediate assistance of a workshop.
Automatic transmission 3
Trans miss ion display
The automatic transmission makes autom atic shifting possible (Automa tic mode) and the version with ActiveS elect also m akes m anual shifting possible (M anual mod e) 3 . The engine can only be started in p osition P or N . When starting in position N, operate footbrake or app ly handbrake. After starting the engine, operate brake before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been selected and the brake is relea sed, the vehicle will "creep" . Never operate the accelerator and the brake peda l simultaneously. The selected gear is display ed in the gear display see Fig. 17022 T.
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life. Selecting D puts the transmission in Automatic mode. In the version without ActiveS elect, only select 3, 2 a nd 1 to avoid automatic up shifting or when using the engine to brake. Moving the selector lev er to the left in position D in the v ersion w ith Activ eSelect activates Manual m od e, and the gears c an be selected manually b y tapping the selector lever to + or -.
Display of m od e or selected gea r in left position of transmission display. The gear that has been selected by the tra nsmission app ears in the right position of the transmission displa y. P R N D M 3, 2, 1 Pa rk position. Reverse gear. Neutral. Automatic mode. Manua l mode 3 with display of selected gear. Selected gea r 3.
Sele ctor lever settings P, R, N and D (Autom atic m ode)
137
In positions P and N the control indicator illuminates j red in the selector lev er indicator strip if the selector lever is blocked. To eng age P or R, push button on selector lever. The engine can only b e started with lever in position P or N . When position N is selected, press footbrake or engage handbrake before starting. Do not accelerate during the selection procedure. The selector lever can only be mov ed out of position P or N with the ignition switched on and the footbrake applied (selec tor lever lock ). In selector lever position N the selector lever lock is activa ted after a delay and only if the vehicle is stationary.
Gears 3, 2, 1 3
Park position. Front wheels locked . O nly engag e when the vehicle is stationary and the handbrak e is applied. The transmission display shows " P" . Reverse gear. Only engage when the vehic le is stationary. The transmission display shows "R". Neutra l or idle. The transm ission display shows "N" . Drive position for norma l driving in 1st gear to top gear. "D" and the current gear are shown in the transmission display.
N D
3, 2, 1 The transm ission d oes not shift beyond the selec ted g ear. Press button on selector lev er to eng age 3 or 1. The current gear is d isplay ed in the transmission displa y.
138

The selected g ear is displayed in the tra nsmission display see page 136. The automatic neutral is ac tiv ated when: the selector lev er is in automatic or Manual mode 3, the selector lev er is in position 3, 2 or 1 3, the footbrake is dep ressed, the v ehicle is stationary, the a ccelerator peda l is not actuated , the transmission fluid tem perature is greater than 0 C .
Active Se lect (Manual mode) 3
Electronically controlled driving programmes
Move selector lever out of position D towards the left and then forwards or back wards.
As soon as the brake is released and the accelerator ped al is depressed, the vehicle sta rts off in the usual manner. z When SPO RT mode is engaged, the transm ission shifts at higher engine speeds (unless cruise control is on). C ontrol indicator 1 illuminates in the transm ission display . S PO RT mode see page 150. z Winter programm e: Press button T see page 139. z Automatic neutral shift function automatically sets the transm ission to N to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at traffic lights. z The opera ting temperature programm e autom atically brings the ca talytic conv erter to the tem perature tha t is required for optimum emission reduction after a cold start by selecting an appropriate gear (increa sed engine revs). z The adaptive programme autom atic ally tailors gearshifting to the d riv ing cond itions, e.g. g reater loa d or gradients.
+ -
Shift to a higher g ear Shift to a lower gear
If a higher gear is selec ted at a speed tha t is too slow or a lower g ear is selected at a speed that is too high, the gear will not be changed . This prevents the revs from b eing too low or too high. If the engine revs are too low the transm ission autom atically shifts to a lower gear, but not unless a certain speed has been reached. No a utoma tic shifting to a higher gear takes place at high engine revs. For safety reasons, kickd ow n is also ava ilab le in Manual mode see pa ge 139.
Winter programm e T
In order to prevent damage, the Winter prog ra mme sw itc hes off a utomatica lly at high transmission fluid temp eratures.
139
Kickdown
Versi on with Ac tiveSelect The automa tic transmission automatically selects the driving program s w ith the best possible braking effect. If necessa ry, lower gea rs ca n also b e selected in Manua l mode to inc rease the brak ing effect. 1st gear has the greatest brak ing effect.
"Rocking the ve hicle"
Press b utton T if you are hav ing problems starting-off on a slippery road surfac e. Acti vati on in version wit hout Activ eS elect The Winter p rogram me can be activated in P, R, N, D, 3 (T illuminates in the transm ission display). The vehicle starts off in 2nd gea r. Acti vati on in version wit h Activ eSelect The Winter programm e can b e activated in Autom atic mode (T illuminates in the transm ission display). The vehicle starts off in 2nd or 3rd gear, depending on the road conditions. To deacti vate The Winter p rogram me is switched off by: z z z z pressing button T a gain, shifting to 2 or 1 3 manually, cha nging to Manua l mode, turning off the ignition. Depressing the ac celera tor p edal past the pressure point: dep ending on the engine speed the transm ission shifts to a lower gear. Full eng ine power is available for accelerating . For safety reasons kickdown is a vailable in both automa tic and Manual mode.
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole, mov e the selector lever from D to R in a repeat p attern while simultaneously app ly ing light pressure to the a ccelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid sudden a cceleration. This applies only to the ex ceptional circumstances mentioned above.
Engine braking
Version wit hout Activ eSel ec t In order to utilize the engine b ra king effect when driving d ow nhill, selec t gear 3, 2 or, if necessary, 1 in good tim e. The braking a ction is most effective in gear 1. If gea r 1 is selected at too high a speed, the transmission rema ins in second gear until the shift point for first gear is reached , e.g. a s a result of deceleration.
140

Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the ha ndb ra ke, then select P. Remove ignition key or with Op en&Start system remove electronic k ey from the vehicle. Lock vehicle, otherwise b attery m ay b ecome discharged if vehicle is park ed up for long periods. The ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the selector lever is not in position P when the ignition is switched off, the control indicator j and P flash in the selector lever indicator strip see page 137, Fig. S 11560, move selector lever to position P. If there is a p roblem with the autom atic transmission, control indica tor A illuminates. The transmission no longer shifts automatically. The v ehicle can continue to be driven. Illumination of control indicator A may also indicate a problem with the engine electronics see page 147. With diesel engines 1) Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTH, illumination of control indicator A may also m ean tha t the diesel fuel filter requires draining see p age 203. Hav e the cause of the fa ult rectified b y a work shop. Versi on without Ac tiveSelect 2nd gear is unava ilab le. S electing forwa rd gears 1, 3 and 4 manually using the selector lever: 1 2 3, D = = = 1st gear 3rd gear 4th gear
Manoeuvring the vehicle
To manoeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attem pts to park or in garage entrances, the vehicles creeping movement c an be utilised by releasing the brake pedal. Never actuate a ccelerator and brake pedals simultaneously.
With the Open&S tart sy stem, "P" fla shes in the transm ission display for 10 sec onds with the ignition switched off if P was not selected or the handbrake was not applied before switching the engine off.
Fault
Stopping the vehicle
The selector lever can be left in the chosen gear with the engine running. When stop ping on gradients engag e handbrake or depress brake peda l. To prevent overheating of the transmission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while standing if a gear has been selected. Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level crossings.
Versi on with Ac tiveSelect 2nd gear and the highest gear c an be selected in Manua l mode. Depending on the nature of the problem, only the highest gear may be availab le. O nly the highest gear is ava ila ble in D in Automatic mode.
1)
Sales des ig nation see p ag e 213.
Interruption of power supply
141
Do not drive faster than three quarters of ma ximum speed. Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km ).
Neve r coas t with e ngine not running
Many units will not function in this situa tion (e.g. brak e serv o unit, electro-hyd ra ulic power-assisted steering ). Driving in this ma nner is a danger to y ourself and others.
Brake servo unit
If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector lev er ca nnot be moved out of position P or N. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using jump leads see pag e 171. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, release selector lev er: 1. Ap ply handbrake. 2. Remove ashtra y 3 see page 79. Release screw on m etal cov er 3 and remove both parts. Vehicle toolkit see pa ge 174. 3. Unclip ashtray holder 3 or cover: to do this, reach into the opening a t the top edge, unclip the ashtray holder 3 or cov er and remove.
4. Pull loop and move selector lever out of position P or N. 5. Put on ashtray hold er 3 or cover a nd eng age. 6. Attach metal cover with sc rew. Insert ashtra y 3 see page 79. Engaging P or N again effects lock ing once more. Hav e the cause of the interrup tion of power supply rectified b y a work shop.
When the engine is not running, the brak e servo unit is no long er effective onc e the brak e pedal has been depressed once or twice, brak ing effect is not reduc ed, but significa ntly greater forc e is required for brak ing.
Electro-hydraulic power-assiste d steering
If the power-assisted steering fails when being towed with the eng ine switched off, the vehicle can still be steered , but consid erably more force is required.
Driving hints
Driving in mountainous terrain or with a caravan / trailer
The firs t 6 00 m ile s (100 0 km)
Driv e y our v ehicle at various speed s. Do not use full throttle. Never allow the engine to labour at low rev s. Make good use of all gears. Depress the accelerator ped al a ma ximum of around three quarters of the available p edal travel in all gea rs.
The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed. S ince a c onsiderab le am ount of heat is generated at high engine speeds and less at slower speeds, do not shift down when climb ing hills whilst the vehic le is still coping with the gradient in the hig her gear.
142

Overrun
The fuel supply is automatically shut off during ov errun, e. g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect, do not accelerate during ov errun and, if in m anual transmission mode, do not declutch. To prevent damage to the catalytic converter, ov errun cut-off is temporarily deac tiv ated when the catalytic converter tempera ture is high. Vehicles wit h turbochar ged eng ine 3 Flow-generated noises m ay be audible if the accelerator is released q uick ly on account of a irflow in the turb ocharger.
Driving with a roof load
Do not ex ceed the permissib le roof load see pages 164, 217. For rea sons of safety, distrib ute the load ev enly and secure it properly with retaining straps. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not drive faster than 75 mp h (120 km/h). C heck and retighten the straps frequently. O bserve country-specific regulations.
Change down!
When decreasing speed, shift down into the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch with a high-revving eng ine. This is especially im porta nt when hill climbing.
Clutch operation
Alway s d epress the c lutch pedal hard to the floor to p revent shifting difficulties and transmission damage. When driving, do not use the p edal a s a footrest; this will cause sub stantial clutch wear.
Switching off the e ngine
When you switch off the eng ine, fans in the engine compartment may continue running for a tim e to c ool the engine. If the engine temperature is v ery high, e.g. after driv ing in mountainous terrain: allow the engine to idle for approxim ately tw o minutes in order to prevent heat accumulation. Vehi cles w ith turb ocharged engine 3 After running at hig h engine speeds or high engine loads, opera te the engine briefly at a low load or run in neutral for approx. 30 second s before switc hing off in order to protect the turbocha rger.
Cooling fan
Engine s pe ed Warming up
Driv e in a low engine speed range for each gear a s m uc h as possible. Run engine wa rm , do not wa rm up in idle. Do not a pply full gas until the operating temperature has been reached. After a cold start, the automatic tra nsmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in Automatic mode shifts into higher gears at higher rpm. This allows the ca ta lytic conv erter to quic kly reach the tem perature required for optim um pollutant reduction.
The cooling fan is controlled v ia a therm oswitch and therefore only runs if nec essary . Depending on the engine, the cooling fan comes on autom atically when the diesel particle filter 3 is b eing cleaned.
P edals
Do not place any ob jects in the footwell which could slip under the ped als and inhibit the pedal trav el. To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, there must be no mats in the area of the pedals.
Save ene rgy more m ile s / kilometre s

Please note the instruc tions for running in under " The first 600 miles (1000 km)" and the tips for saving energy on the next few pages.
Battery care
Good, technica lly correct and economical driving ensures ma ximum durability and performance for your vehic le.
Correct gear sele ction
Do not ra ce y our engine while the tra nsmission is in neutral or with a low gea r selected. S top-a nd -g o traffic and driving at a speed too high for the selected gear or tra nsmission ratio increases engine wear and fuel consum ption.
When driving slowly or when the v ehicle is stationary , e.g. in slow urban traffic, stopand-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all unnecessary electrical load s w here possible (e. g. heated rear window, heated seats). Declutch w hen sta rting in order to relieve the strain on the starter and the ba ttery.
143
Saving fuel, protecting the environment

Trend-setting technology
When dev eloping and manufac turing your vehic le, Vauxhall used environmentfriendly and in the m ain recyc la ble materials. The p roduction m ethods used to mak e y our v ehicle are likewise env ironmenta lly -compatible. Recycling of production wastes keeps the circulation of material closed. Reduction of energy a nd water requirements a lso help s to conserve natural resources. The a dvanced design ma kes it easier to dismantle the vehicle at the end of its service life a nd separate materials for recy cling. Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium are not used . The refrigerant in the air conditioning system 3 is C FC -free. New painting techniques employ water as a solvent.
Drive in an e nergy and e nvironmentcons cious way

z High fuel consumption, noise lev els and exhaust emission are often caused b y a driving style that is not energy and env ironment-c onscious.
Uniform speed
z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel consumption, the ex haust emissions, the proportion of pollutant in the exhaust gas and the noise level. z Do not accelerate a nd brake unnecessarily . Drive at uniform speed. Avoid freq uent starting-off and stopping e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans of clever planning . Select road s w ith good traffic flow .
z Y ou should therefore drive with energy in mind: "more miles with less fuel". Reduce the noise level and exhaust emissions b y adopting an environmentconsc ious driving style. This is ex tremely worthwhile and im proves the quality of life. Fuel consum ption d epend s to a great extent on your own personal d riv ing style. The following hints are intended to help you consume fuel at a rate that is as close as possible to the specified levels see page 215. C heck y our v ehicle s fuel consumption every time you refuel. This facilitates early detection of any irregula rities causing increased fuel consumption.
Idling
z The eng ine also consumes fuel when idling . z If you have to wait for more than one minute, it is worthwhile switching off the engine. Fiv e m inutes of idling corresponds to ap prox . 0.6 miles (1 km ) of driving.
Ove rrun
End-of-life vehicle recove ry
For detailed inform ation on Vauxhalls on-going commitment to achieving a n env ironmenta lly sustainable future, including ; desig n for recy cling, take b ack of End-of-Life Vehicles (ELVs) and the recy cling of ELVs, view www. vauxhall.co.uk/recy cling for details.
Warming up
z Full throttle and warming up a t idle speed increa se wear, fuel consum ption, exhaust emission, the amount of pollutant in the ex ha ust and the amount of noise. z Drive off as soon as possible after starting.
z The fuel supply is automatically shut off during ov errun, e.g. when the vehicle is being d riv en down long grad ients or when braking see page 142. z To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect and sa ve fuel, during overrun do not accelerate a nd do not dec lutch. z Correct gear selection. z High revs increa se engine wear and fuel consumption. z Do not race y our engine. Avoid driving at hig h engine speeds.
144

Roof racks, ski-holders
z Due to air resistance, a roof load can increase fuel consum ption by approx . 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100km ). z Remove them if they are not being used.
Driv ing with an ey e on the tachom eter saves fuel. I f possib le, drive a t low rev s in each gear and a t a consta nt speed. Driv e in top g ear as m uch a s p ossible, shift up as soon as possib le and do not shift down until the engine is no longer running truly .
Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling

Fuel cons umption
Fuel consum ption is determined under spec ific driv ing conditions see pag e 215. S pecial equipment increases the weight of the vehicle. As a result, they can increase fuel consum ption and reduc e the specified ma ximum speed. For the first few thousand miles / kilometres, friction between the engine and transmission components is higher. This increases fuel consum ption.
Re pair and mainte nance
High speed
z The faster the speed, the higher the consumption and the noise level. Driving at full throttle uses up a g reat deal of fuel and generates ex cessive noise a nd hig h emission levels. z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal results in distinct fuel sa ving s w ith no major loss of speed. Driv e at no m ore than around three qua rters of m aximum speed and y ou will use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a great deal of time.
z Imp roper repairs or a djustment and maintenance work c an inc rease fuel consump tion. Do not c arry out work on the engine y ourself. Y ou may infringe env ironmenta l laws out of ignorance b y not disposing of materials prop erly. Appropriate parts might not be recy cled. C ontact w ith some of the m aterials involved may pose a health hazard. z We recommend that rep air and maintenance be entrusted to y our Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.
Fuel for pe trol engine s
Tyre pressure
z Ina dequate tyre pressure, leading to higher road resista nce, c osts money in tw o ways: m ore fuel and increased ty re wear. z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off.
Extreme driving conditions
z Driving up steep grad ients, cornering , driving on poor roads and winter driving all increase fuel consum ption. Fuel consum ption increases drama tica lly in urban traffic and at w inter temperatures, especially on short trips when the engine operating temperature is not reached. z Follow the hints giv en abov e to k eep consump tion to a minimum under such conditions.
N orma l commercia l high-quality fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 5% in acc orda nce with DIN EN 228 are suitable (for catalytic conv erter see page 146, for octane numbers see pages 212, 213). The quality thereof has consid erable effect on the performance, running and serv ice life of the engine. The additives mix ed with the fuel are extremely important. For this reason y ou m ust only refuel with highquality fuels c ontaining additives. Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5% do not comp ly with DIN EN 228 and m ust not be used unless the vehicle has been spec ifically dev eloped and ap prov ed for these fuels. Fuel with too low an octane rating can cause pinking. N o lia bility will be acc epted for resulting damage.
Ele ctrical loads
z The power consumption of electrical equipment increases fuel consum ption. z Switch off additional consumers (e.g. air cond itioning 3, heated rear wind ow ) when they are no longer required .
Petrol with a higher octane number can alway s b e used. The use of 91 octane fuel is not p ermitted in vehic les with the Z 22 YH 1 ) engine. The ignition timing a djusts autom atically to the grad e of fuel used (octane numb er) see pages 212, 213. Use of petrol with an octane ra ting of 95 will ensure ec onomical driving. For vehicles with Z 20 LEH1) engine, use of 95 RON fuel red uces performance and torque. Diesel fuels with improved low temperature prop erties are therefore available on the market during the winter m onths. Make sure that y ou fill the tank with winter fuel before the start of the cold weather season. Ad ditives can be used w ith diesel fuels with winter properties that are guaranteed b y the manufacturer and when using d iesel fuel filters tha t are heated depending on the outside tem perature. Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels that are intended for petrol engines.
145
9 Warn ing
Care must be ta ken when hand ling fuel. Before refuelling, switch off the eng ine and where applicab le any auxiliary heating with combustion cha mbers (see sticker on fuel filler cap ). Switch off mobile phones.
9 Warn ing
Fuel is inflamm able and ex plosive. Therefore, when handling fuel or when in the vicinity of fuel, avoid nak ed flam es and sparks. Do not smoke! This also applies where fuel c an be detected b y its characteristic smell. If y ou can smell fuel in your vehicle, have the cause of this rectified immediately by a workshop.
Fuel for diesel engine s
Diesel engines must be operated only on commercially ava ila ble diesel fuel meeting the specific ations of DIN EN 590. Since January 2004, some oil companies have mixed their diesel fuel with up to 5% Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters) like RME (Rape-O il Methy l Ester). This is in accordance with the c urrent DIN EN 590 and does not harm the fuel injection system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not differ from conventional diesel fuel a nd do not influence the vehicles drivea bility . Im portant : Diesel fuel m ix ed with 5% FAME according to DIN EN 590 m ust not be confused w ith 100% Bio Diesel, which is not to be used in Vauxhall engines. The flow a nd filterability of diesel fuel are tem perature-d epend ent.
1)
Fuel filler cap
If replacing the fuel filler c ap, be sure to use a genuine fuel filler cap for your model to ensure full functionality. Diesel-engined vehicles hav e special fuel filler c aps.
Re fue lling
Sa les desig nation see pa ge 21 2.
146
Fuel filler neck at right rear sid e of vehicle. The tank fla p is locked together w ith the doors see page 37. O pen the tank flap. Unsc rew the fuel filler ca p, remove and suspend from the tank flap . The fuel tank has a limiting system whic h prevents overfilling of the tank. Correct filling depends to a large extent on proper operation of the fuel dispensing pump: 1. Fully insert the pump nozzle a nd switch it on. 2. At automa tic sw itch off, the specified ta nk capac ity is rea ched a fter continued, measured filling. Leave the filler nozzle in place until the flow stops. To close, place fuel filler ca p in p osition and turn, overcom ing the resistanc e until the ratchet on the cap engages a udib ly . Close ta nk flap. Wipe off any overflow ing fuel immediately.
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
Catalytic converte r for petrol engines
possible. C ontinue emergency driving for a short period, m aintaining low speed and rev s. Irregular engine running a nd lack of power w hen the Electronic Stab ility Program me (ESP Pl us 3) kick s in a re for operational reasons and can be ignored see page 148. z If unb urned fuel enters the cataly tic conv erter, this may result in overheating and irreparable damage to the c atalytic conv erter. You should therefore av oid unnecessarily long use of the starter when starting-off, running the tank d ry (an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to overhea ting) and starting the engine by pushing or towing. z If the control indicator Z for ex ha ust fla shes, ease back on the accelerator until the fla shing stop s a nd the control ind ic ator com es on. Seek the immediate assista nce of a work shop. C ontrol ind ic ator Z for ex ha ust see page 147.
Leaded fuel will da mage the cata ly tic conv erter and parts of the electronic sy stem, rend ering them inoperative. High quality fuels other than those listed on pages 144, 212 (e.g. LR P1 )) could damag e the cataly tic conv erter. Damage to the ca talytic converter or the vehicle may result if the follow ing points are not observed: z In the event of faulty ignition, uneven running a fter cold starting , clear red uc tion in engine performa nce or other unusua l problems which may point to a fault in the ignition system, seek assistance of a workshop as soon as
Catalytic converter for dies el engine s

Dama ge to the catalytic conv erter or the vehicle m ay result if the following points are not observed :
1)
LRP = L ead Rep la cem ent Petro l.
z In the event of uneven running, a clear reduction in engine performance or other unusual problem s, seek the assista nce of a work shop as soon as possible. C ontinue emergency driving for a short period, m aintaining low speed and rev s.
Irregular engine running and la ck of power when the Electronic Stability Programm e (ESP Pl us 3) kicks in are for op erational reasons a nd can be ig nored see pa ge 148. Control i nd icator Z for exhaust C ont rol indic ator A for eng ine electronics
147
Controlling exhaust emission
Illum inates when the ignition is switched on and during the start attem pt. Goes off shortly after the eng ine sta rts running. If it illum inates while the engine is running, it ind ic ates a fault in the emission control sy stem. The perm itted ex ha ust values may be exceed ed. Seek the immediate assista nce of a w ork shop. If it flashes while the engine is running, this indica tes a fault which could lead to damage to the catalytic converter. Continuing to drive without causing damage is possible if you ease up on the throttle until the flashing stops and the control indicator illuminates. S eek the immed iate assistance of a workshop.
Illuminates for several seconds when the ignition is switched on. If it illuminates when the eng ine is running, there is a fault in engine or transmission electronics. The electronic sy stem switches to an emergency running p rogram me. Fuel consum ption m ay be increa sed and the driveability of the vehicle m ay be impaired. In some cases, faults can be rectified by switching off the engine and restarting it. If the control indicator illuminates again when the engine is running, seek the assistance of a workshop to rectify the cause of the fault. If it illuminates briefly, but does not rec ur, it is of no significance. If A illum ina tes, this may a lso indicate that water is present in the diesel fuel filter 3. At the sam e time, a text message
Design measures ma inly in the area of the injection sy stem and ignition sy stem, in combination with the ca talytic converter have reduced the proportion of harmful sub stances in the ex ha ust gases, such as carbon m onoxid e (C O), hydrocarbons (CH) and nitrous ox id es (NO x), to a minim um.
148

autom atic ally under set driving conditions and may take up to 25 minutes. Fuel consumption may be higher during this period. The em ission of smells and smoke thus occurring is normal. Und er certain driving conditions, e.g. short distances, the system cannot c lean itself autom atic ally. When the control indicator ! flashes, you should continue driving and as soon as the road and traffic conditions so perm it, increase y our speed to ov er 25 mph (40 km/h); cleaning of the diesel particle filter will then comm ence. Cleaning takes place most q uick ly at high speed a nd under load. The engine sp eed should not fa ll below 2000 rpm . The c ontrol indicator will go out as soon as cleaning is complete. We recommend that y ou do not turn off the ignition during cleaning. Y ou are thereby making an im portant contribution towards keeping the air clean and c om pliance w ith emissions legislation. The Serv ic e work includes testing and adjusting the fuel injection system and the ignition sy stem. For this reason, ha ve all S ervice work carried out at the intervals spec ified in the S ervice Booklet.
appears in the service display see page 88. Have the diesel fuel filter check ed for any resid ual water see page 203. If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, there is a fault in the imm obiliser sy stem. The engine ca nnot be started see page 30.
Exhaust gases
9 Warning
Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous carbon monoxide, which is colourless and od ourless and could be fatal if inhaled . If ex haust gases enter the interior of the vehicle, open the windows and seek the assistance of a workshop. Av oid driving with an open luggage com partment. Otherwise, ex haust gases could penetrate the interior. During the first drive, sm ok e m ay d evelop because of wax a nd oil eva pora ting on the exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the open for a while after the first drive and avoid inhaling the fum es.
Drive Control Systems
IDS+ = Interactive Driving System 3
The IDS + link s the sensors and control units of the Elec tronic S tability Programme (ES PP lu s ), the Anti-lock Brak e S ystem (ABS) and the C ontinuous Damp ing C ontrol (CDC ). This g ives excellent driving dy na mics at the same time as high sa fety levels.
Electronic Stability P rogramme (ESP Plus ) 3
Maintenance
Diese l particle filter 3
The d iesel pa rticle filter system filters harmful soot pa rticles out of the ex ha ust gases. The system includ es a self-cleaning func tion at set intervals. The filter is cleaned by burning off the soot particles at high temperature. This proc ess takes place
Have all maintena nce work c arried out at the intervals spec ified. We recomm end that y ou entrust this work to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who ha s p roper equipment and trained personnel available. Electronic testing sy stems fa cilitate rapid diagnosis and remed y of fa ults. This w ay you can be certain that all components of the vehic les electrical, injection and ignition system s operate correctly, that your vehicle has a low level of polluta nt em ission and tha t the cataly tic conv erter system will have a long serv ice life.
ESP Pl us improves driving stability when nec essary in any driving situation regardless of the type of road surface or tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels from spinning, irrespective of roa d surface typ e and tyre g rip . The sy stem monitors v ehicle movem ents. As soon as the vehicle sta rts to swerv e (understeers / oversteers) engine output is reduc ed (the sound of the engine changes) and indiv id ual wheels are specifically brak ed. This consid erably improves the driving stability of the vehicle on snow and ice and on wet or slip pery road surfaces.
ES PP lu s is ready for operation as soon as the ig nition is switched on and control indicator v goes out. The ESP Pl us control process is displa yed by the flashing of v. The v ehicle is now in a critical situation; ES PP lu s allows you to keep control of the vehic le and reminds you to match your speed to the road conditions. Control i nd icator v
149
Sw itching off 3 ESP Pl us can b e deactivated if SPO RT mode 3 is engaged (LED in SPO RT button illuminates) for hig h performance driving: Hold the SPO RT button down for around 4 seconds, the control indicator v comes on. The service disp la y also show s ESPoff see page 88.
9 Warning
Do not let this special safety feature tempt y ou into tak ing risks when driving. Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsib le driving style. Illum inates for a few second s w hen the ignition is switc hed on. The sy stem is now ready for operation. Flashing during driving: This shows the sy stem has come into action. The engine output ma y be reduced (the sound of the engine changes) and the vehicle may be braked automatically to a sma ll degree. Illum inates whilst driving: The system is switched off or a fault is present. C ontinued driving is possible. The driving stability ca n however deteriorate depending on road surface conditions. Switch on ES P P lu s again or have the c ause of the fault rectified . Self-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of fa ults.
9 Warn ing
ESP P lu s should not be d eactivated if one of the run-flat ty res 3 has no pressure.
Pl us is reactiv ated by pressing the ESP SPO RT button a gain or sw itching on the ignition.
S PO RT mode see p age 150.
150

cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the sy stem fa cilitates rapid rectifica tion of faults. To act ivat e
CDC (Continuous Dam ping Control) 3
CDC ad apts vehicle da mping to the current driving situation a nd roa d conditions. The sy stem continually monitors w heel and vehic le mov ements and immediately modifies the damping of each shock absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally adap ted to the driving situation and road conditions. When SPO RT mode is engaged, the dam ping control is ada pted to a sp ortier driving style ("harder" chassis setting). SPO RT mode see right column. Cont rol indica tor IDS+ for Conti nuous Damp ing Cont rol
Sport mode 3
SPORT mode is used to cha ng e damping 3 , steering 3, throttle application 3 and the shifting point for autom atic transmission 3 and Easytronic 3 whilst driving. Damping and steering become more direct and provide better contact with the road surface. The engine reacts more quickly to accelerator movements. With automatic transmission 3 a nd Easytronic 3, shifting times are reduced and gearshifting occurs at higher engine speeds (unless cruise control is on). Press the S PO RT button. The LED in the button illum inates. In v ehicles with Automatic transmission 3 or Easy tronic 3, the control indicator 1 also illumina tes. S PO RT mode cannot be sw itched on if the Winter programm e 3 is active (vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Easy tronic 3). For Winter programme see pag e 139. To deact ivat e Briefly press the S PO RT button again or switch off the ignition. The LED in the button goes out.
Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds when the driv ers door is opened. If it illum inates whilst driving , this indica tes a fault in the system. The sy stem is not opera tional. The system switches to the harder chassis setting for reasons of safety . Hav e the
Holding it p ressed switches off ESP P lu s see page 149. SPORT m ode remains eng aged.
SPO RT mode is switched off when the Winter programme 3 is a ctiv ated (vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Ea sy tronic 3 ). Winter programme see page 139. Cont rol indica tor IDS+ for SPO RT mode For safety reasons the cruise control cannot b e ac tiv ated until the footbrake ha s b een op erated onc e. Cruise control is operated with buttons m , g, and on the turn signal stalk. Do not use the cruise control if it is not advisable to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in situations presenting a danger to yourself and other road users, in heavy traffic or on wind ing, slipp ery or greasy roads). The cruise control must only be switched on in Automatic mode with automa tic tra nsmission 3 and Ea sytronic 3 . When the cruise control is active, reaction tim es ma y b e increased due to the d ifferent position of the feet. Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds when the driv ers door is opened. If it illum inates whilst driving , this indica tes a fault in the system. The system is not opera tional. Hav e the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of faults. C ont rol indic ator m
151
When driving, control indicator m will illuminate as soon as the system is switched on.
9 Warning
The driv er is also responsible for maintaining an app ropriate speed if the cruise control is on. Failure to follow instructions can c ause injuries or put lives at risk .
Cruis e control 3
The c ruise c ontrol can store and maintain speeds of approx. 20 to 125 m ph (30 to 200 km/h). Deviations from the stored speeds may occur when driving uphill or downhill.
To act ivat e Briefly press button m: the current speed is stored and maintained. The accelerator pedal can be released .
152

z if the clutch p edal is depressed or z if the selector lever of automatic transm ission 3 or Easy tronic 3 is in N. Resumi ng the stored speed Briefly press button g at a speed ab ov e 20 mp h (30 km/h): the speed selected before the cruise control was switched off is resum ed. The value of the stored speed is deleted when the ig nition is turned off.
Vehicle speed can be increased by depressing the accelerator pedal. When the a ccelerator peda l is released, the previously stored speed is resum ed. Incr ease With cruise control activ e, hold down button m or briefly press it repea tedly: speed is increased continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the accelerator pedal. When button m is released the current speed is stored and m aintained. Reduce With cruise control activ e, hold down button g or briefly press it repeatedly: speed is reduced continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h). When button g is released the current speed is stored and m aintained. To deacti vate Briefly press button : C ruise control is switched off, control indicator m goes out and the vehicle slow ly decelerates. To continue driving, d epress the accelerator pedal in the usual manner. For reasons of safety, cruise control deactivates under certain driving conditions. For exa mple: z if the vehic les speed drops below approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) or z if the brake pedal is depressed or
Parking dis tance sensors 3

To act ivat e
The p arking distance sensors make reverse parking easier by measuring the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle at the front and the rear, and emitting an acoustic signal in the p assenger compartment. The sy stem records the distance using four sensors in the front and rear bumpers.
If the ignition is on, the front and rear park ing distance sensors automatically come on when reverse gea r is selected.
The p arking dista nce sensors ca n also be enab led m anually at a speed of less than 15 mph (25 k m/h) using the r button on the instrum ent panel. Function stand by is indicated by an illuminated LED in the button r. If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle at the front or the rear, a series of acoustic signa ls is hea rd in the v ehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter as the obstacle becomes closer. The signal is continuous if the distance is less than 30 cm . Control i nd icator r
153
In trailer mode, the rear parking distance sensors are automatically switched off when the trailer cable is inserted into the socket. Fitti ng rear load racks 3 Rear load rack s, e.g . bicy cle rack s, fitted nea r the sensors could disrupt the system .
Automatic level control 3
9 Warning
Und er certain circum stances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as w ell as external noise sourc es may cause the system to fail to detect ob stacles. For this reason, care must be ta ken when reversing even if the park ing distance sensors are operational. This is of p artic ular im porta nce when in the vicinity of ped estria ns. To deacti vate To sw itch the system off, press r button, and LED in button will g o off. The sy stem a utomatica lly switches itself off when the vehicle is being driven forwards with a speed above approx. 15 mph (25 k m/h).
If it illum ina tes: Fault in the sy stem. The sy stem is not op erational. Hav e the cause of the fa ult rectified by a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of fa ults. If it flashes: The fault is d ue to sensors obstructed with snow or ice. The sensors must be undam aged a nd free of d irt, snow and ic e. Interference due to ex ternal sources of ultra sound (e.g . pneum atic drills, rota ry machines). Once the source of interference is removed, the sy stem will operate normally . Cara van / trai ler towing equi pment 3, carav an / trail er t owing The system a utomatica lly detects if a tow bar is properly fitted to the vehicle. Automatic level control makes it possib le to keep the heig ht of the vehicle constant when subjected to d ifferent loads in the rear (e. g. w hen towing a carava n or trailer). This significantly improves driving conditions. The vehicle is autom atically raised at the rear, increasing the spring travel and ground clearanc e. The autom atic lev el control sy stem is activa ted a fter approx. 2 miles (3 km), depending on the vehicle loading and the nature of the road surface.
154

Control i nd icator w
Headlight range adjustment see page 107. Do not use full payload in the event of a malfunction. Have the c ause of the fault rectified immediately by a workshop .
9 Warn ing
The Deflation Detection Sy stem does not replace manual checks with a suita ble gauge. Check tyre pressures at least every 14 da ys and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be c hecked when cold. Dont forget to chec k the spare 3. Tyre pressure see pages 160, 220. System initi alisati on
Tyre pressure los s monitoring system DDS (Deflation Dete ction Sys te m) 3
The Deflation Detection S ystem continuously monitors the speed of all wheels whilst driving. If a ty re loses pressure, it b ecomes sma ller and rotates more quickly than the other wheels. If the system d etec ts a difference in speed, control indica tor w illuminates red .
Stop imm ediately and chec k tyre p ressure. Mount the spare wheel if necessary see pages 175, 176. The sy stem is op erational when the ignition is switched on and c an detect pressure loss from a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h).
If control indicator w illuminates red whilst driving, there is a loss of pressure. Stop immed iately and check tyre pressures. A maxim um sp eed of 50 m ph (80 km /h) is permitted for run-flat tyres 3. O bserve the information on page 163. If control indicator w illum inates yellow whilst driving, this indicates a fault in the sy stem. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of fa ults. The control indica tor flashes three times when the system is initialising . After c orrecting tyre pressure or changing a ty re / wheel, the system m ust be initialised: With the ignition switched on, press the DDS button for a pprox. 4 seconds. C ontrol indicator w flashes 3 times. The system is operational after driving a certain distance. O nly initialise the system if all tyres hav e the prescribed pressure.
Tyre P re ssure Monitoring System 3
Di sp lay of current tyre p ressure The Ty re Pressure Monitoring System continually checks the pressure a nd speed of all four wheels w hilst driving. A pressure sensor is integrated in each wheel. Once a m inute, the pressure of each tyre is sent to a control unit, where it is compared. I f the system detects one or more pressure differences, a m essag e appears on the inform ation d isplay . The c urrent ty re pressures are indicated in the information display. For the sy stem to be opera tional, all wheels must be equipped with pressure sensors and all ty res must be filled to the prescribed pressure. The Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem autom atically detects if the vehicle is being driven with a load of up to 3 persons or a full loa d. O nce the ignition is switched on, the sy stem is operational and w ill continuously monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of approx. 20 m ph (30 km /h) and a bove.
155
For ex ample, the following messages can be displayed:
Board Computer
BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres Navi active
Tyre pressure
ch eck rear lef t (value in ba r) OK
Select menu item Tyres from the Board Comp ut er menu. The current pressure of each tyre is display ed. Wa rning messages A message is g iven on the information display to warn of inconsistent tyre pressures. In som e versions, the m essag e is display ed in abbrev iated form.
A grap hic ind ic ating the left rear tyre is show n tog ether with the current tyre pressure: Slight pressure d eviation. Red uce speed. C heck p ressure a t next opportunity with app ropriate gauge and correc t if nec essary . O n the C olour Information Display this report will appear in yellow .
9 Warning
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System does not replace m anua l chec ks with a suitab le gauge. Check tyre pressures a t least ev ery 14 day s and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold. Dont forget to check the spare 3. Tyre pressure see pa ges 160, 220.
156

Control i nd icator w System initi alisati on
Navi active
Attention!
F ro nt lef t tyre pressure loss (va lu e in bar) OK
A graphic indicating the front left tyre is shown together with the current tyre pressure: S ignificant p ressure deviation or direc t pressure loss. S teer out of flow of traffic as quickly as p ossible w ithout enda ngering other vehicles. S top and check the ty res. Mount the spare wheel 3 if necessary see pages 175, 176. A maximum speed of 50 mph (80 k m/h) is perm itted for run-flat tyres 3. O bserve the information on page 163. O n the Colour Information Display this rep ort w ill appea r in red. Acknowled gement of warning s see page 101.
If control indicator w illum inates yellow whilst driving, this indicates a fault in the Ty re Pressure Monitoring System . Fitting a wheel without a pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel 3) will also lead to a system fault. Have the ca use of the fault rectified by a work shop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system fac ilitates ra pid rec tification of fa ults.
The sy stem must be initialised after a wheel / tyre change: With the ignition sw itc hed on, press b utton DDS for ap prox . 4 seconds. C ontrol indicator w flashes 3 tim es. The sy stem is operational a fter driving a certain distance. O nly initialise the system if all tyres hav e the prescribed pressure (check when tyres are cold). General inform ation The Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem is not operational w hen the temporary spare wheel or spare wheel is used if this is not fitted with a pressure sensor, the control indicator w illuminates yellow. When displaying the tyre p ressure, . appears in the display . The tyre pressure is then monitored by the Deflation Detection S ystem see page 154.
If a complete set of wheels without Ty re Pressure Monitoring S ystem 3 sensors is mounted (e.g. four winter tyres), no error message will be displayed. The Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem is not opera tional. The tyre pressure of a set of wheels w ithout sensors is monitored by the Deflation Detection System see page 154. Sensors for the Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem can b e fitted at a la ter date by a workshop upon request. When ma nually check ing tyre pressure w ith a p ressure gauge, screw the adapter onto the v alve. Tyre pressure see pages 160, 220. Ev ery time you change a tyre, the v alve inserts a nd sealing rings from the Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem m ust be rep la ced by a workshop. The use of com mercially availab le liquid filled run-flat systems or rep air kits can impair the function of the system. Vauxhall-approved sy stems can be used. Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, walkie-talkies) opera ted in the area could cause interference in the Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem. To improve effectiveness, do not brake unnec essarily ha rd for the first 125 miles (200 km) after new brak e p ads ha ve been fitted. Brake pad wear must not ex ceed a specified lim it. Reg ular maintenance as detailed in the S ervice Booklet is therefore of the utmost im porta nce for traffic sa fety. Have worn brake pads replaced by a work shop. Pa ds which hav e b een tested a nd passed ensure optimum brak e perform ance. Brake pads worn to their minimum a re noisy. It is possible to continue driving . Have y our brak e pads replaced as soon as possible. Seek the assista nce of a workshop for replacing the brake pads.
157
Powerful app lic ation of the brake ped al automatically applies m aximum b ra king force amplification to achieve the shortest possible braking distance und er full brak ing (b rake assist). Maintain steady pressure on the b rake pedal for as long as full-on brak ing is to continue. When the brake pedal is released, the m aximum b ra ke force am plification is taken away .
Adaptive brake light 3 Footbrake
During full-on brak ing, all three brake lights flash for the dura tion of ABS control. The footbrake comprises two independ ent brak e circuits. If a brak e circuit fails, the vehicle can still be brak ed using the other brake circuit. However, braking effect is achieved only when you dep ress the pedal firmly. You need to use considerab ly more force for this. The brak ing distance is ex tended. S eek the a ssistance of a workshop before continuing y our journey . To ensure the full peda l travel can be utilized, especially in case of a fault in one of the b ra ke circuits, there m ust be no ma ts in the vicinity of the pedals see page 142. When the engine is not running, the assistance of the brake servo unit disappears once the brak e pedal ha s been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not red uced, but braking req uires significa ntly greater force. This is especially important to bear in mind w hen towing.
Brake assist
Brake system
The effectiveness of the brakes is a n important factor for traffic safety.
158

Handbrake Brake system control indicator R
Check the brake lights b efore starting out on a journey. On v ehicles with check control 3 the brake lights are check ed automatically see page 101. Just before sta rting a ny journey, check effectiveness of brake system at slow speed and w ithout obstructing m ov ing traffic, particularly if b ra kes are wet, e. g. after driv ing through an automatic car wash. The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed reg ularly . If the brake fluid level is too low and the hand brake is not ap plied, control indicator R on the instrument cluster illuminates see pa ge 84.
Hill Start Assis t 3 (HSA)
The system helps pull away on inclines. After releasing the footbrake, if the handbrake is not applied the brak es are only released after 2 seconds. As soon as the a cceleration is sufficient to prevent rolling back, the brak e is released.
Alw ays apply handb ra ke firmly . On slopes apply the handb ra ke as firmly as possible. The mechanical handbrake a ffects the rear wheel brakes. They automatically engag e when the lever is pulled. To relea se the handbrak e, lift handle slightly, press relea se button and lower ha ndle all the way down. To reduce the operating forces of the ha ndb ra ke, dep ress the footbrak e a t the sam e time.
The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the handbrake is app lied or if the b ra ke or clutch fluid level is too low. B ra ke fluid see page 205. For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control indicator flashes for a few second s w hen the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is not applied.
9 Warn ing
If the control indicator comes on when the ha nd brake is off, stop, terminate y our journey immediately . Seek the assistance of a workshop.
159
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)

The ABS continuously monitors the brake system a nd prevents the wheels from locking, independently of the ty pe of road surface and the tyre grip.
Control indicator u for ABS
Fault
9 Warn ing
If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may be subjec t to locking due to braking that is heavier tha n normal. The ad vantages of AB S are no longer opera tional. Y ou can continue driving, provided y ou drive with care and anticipation. Hav e the cause of the fa ult rectified b y a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the sy stem facilitates rapid rectification of faults. Illum inates for a few second s a fter the ignition is turned on. The sy stem is read y for operation when the control indicator goes out. If the control indicator does not go out after a few seconds, or if it illuminates whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the ABS. The brake system remains operational without ABS regulation.
It starts to regulate the braking p ressure as soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock. The v ehicle remains steera ble, even in the event of very heavy braking, for instance on bends or when sw erving to av oid an obstacle. Even in the ca se of full-on braking, the ABS makes it p ossible to drive round an obsta cle without releasing the brakes. ABS control is made app arent through a pulse in the brake peda l and the noise of the regulation proc ess.
Wheels, tyres
9 Warning
For optimum b ra king, keep the brak e pedal fully depressed throughout the braking process, despite the fa ct that the pedal is pulsating. Do not red uce the pressure on the pedal. Do not let this special safety feature tempt y ou into tak ing risks when driving. Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsib le driving style.
S ee page 220 for suitable tyres and restrictions. Factory-fitted ty res are matched to the chassis and offer optimum driving comfort and safety .
Changing tyre / whe el type
Se lf-check
N ote the necessary modifications before switching to different ty res or wheels. If ty res of a different size than those fitted at the factory are used, the electronic speedometer may req uire reprogramm ing to ensure that the correct speed is displayed.
Each time the ignition is turned on and the engine started , after moving away from a speed of around 2 mph (3 k m/h) the system performs a self-check which may be audible.
160
9 Warning
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may lead to a ccidents and rend er the vehicle unroadworthy. Vehi cles w ith Tyr e Pressure Monit oring System 3 When using winter ty res or when switching to different tyre sizes, sensors for the Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem c an be fitted at a later da te by a workshop upon req uest. Otherw ise, the system would not indicate tyre pressure dev iations. Deflation Detection System 3 see page 154. Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 see page 155. Vehi cles w ith run-flat tyr es 3 When switching wheels, e.g. when switching to winter tyres, use run-flat tyres as there is no spare wheel or tyre repair k it in the v ehicle. Run-fla t tyres 3 see page 163.
Fit directional tyres such tha t they roll in the direction of travel. The rolling direc tion is indica ted b y a sym bol (e.g . an arrow) on the sidewall. Ty res fitted op posing the rolling direction (e.g. when a ty re is changed) should be refitted as soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design prop erties of the ty re. Run-flat ty res 3 must not be combined with conv entional tyres. Observ e legal requirements when disposing of tyres. Some b ra nd s of tyres have a b eaded ed ge for a lloy wheels to protect against damage. If wheel trim is used on steel wheels with beaded-edg e ty res, the following procedure must be followed: z Wheel trims and ty res that are a pproved by Va ux ha ll for the respectiv e v ehicle and comply with a ll of the relevant wheel and tyre combination requirements must be used. z If the wheel trims and ty res used are not Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not have a b eaded edge.
Tyre press ure
C heck ty re pressure, including the sp are wheel, a t least every 14 da ys and prior to any long journey ; the ty res should b e checked when cold. Don t forget to chec k the spare 3.
Use the valve cap key to mak e unscrewing the valv e caps easier. The key is located on the inside of the tank flap.
Fitting ne w tyres
Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is ev en better. Ensure that tyres on one a xle are z the same size z the same design z the same make z and with the same tread pattern.
9 Warning
Use of unsuitab le tyres or wheel trim s could lead to sudden pressure loss and thereby a ccidents.
Tyre condition, wheel condition
161
Drive ov er edges slowly and at right angles if possible. Driving ov er sharp ed ges can cause concealed damag e to ty res and wheels that only becom es noticeable later.
In vehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 there is an a dapter in the valve cap key . Sc rew ad apter to v alve before attaching tyre pressure gauge see page 155. Tyre pressure see pa ge 220. Do not reduce tyre pressure when the ty res are warm. Otherwise the pressure m ay drop below the permissible minim um when the ty res cool down.
After having chec ked the tyre pressures, tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap key . Incorrect infla tion pressures will imp air safety, v ehicle handling, comfort and fuel economy and will increase tyre wear. If the pressure is too low, this can result in considera ble ty re warm -up and internal damage, leading to trea d separation and even to tyre blow-out at high sp eeds. Hidden ty re d amage is not eliminated by adjusting tyre pressure.
Do not trap ty res when pa rk ing. C heck ty res regularly for d amage (penetrating foreign bodies, na ils, cuts, tears, bulges in side w alls). C heck the wheels for da mage. Seek the assista nce of a work shop in the event of damag e or unusual wear.
9 Warning
Incorrect ty re p ressure can lead to tyre rupture.
9 Warn ing
Damage may lead to tyre blowout.
162

z So as not to impair b ra ke cooling, use only wheel trims approved for use on your vehicle.
Tread depth
Check tread depth at reg ular intervals.
Tyre de signations
Meaning s: e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H 195 = Tyre width, mm 65 = Cross-section ratio (ty re height to tyre width), % R = Belt ty pe: Radial RF = Type: RunFlat Ty res should b e replaced for safety reasons if trea d depth drop s below 2-3 mm (4 m m for winter ty res). The leg ally permissible minimum trea d depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of the tread wea r ind icators (TWI1) ). A numb er of trea d wear indicators are spac ed a t equal interv als around the tyre within the tread. Their position is indica ted by m arking s on the tyre sidewall. 15 = Wheel d ia meter, inches 91 = Load ind ex e.g . 91 is equivalent to 618 kg H = Speed cod e letter S peed code letters: Q S T H V W up to 100 mph (160 km/h) up to 112 mph (180 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 130 mph (210 km/h) up to 150 mph (240 km/h) up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
If there is more wear a t the front tha n the rea r, swap round front wheels and rear wheels. Correct tyre pressure. For vehicles w ith Deflation Detection System 3 or Ty re Pressure M onitoring S ystem 3, initialise the system see pages 154, 156.
Ge neral information
z The danger of aq uap laning is greater if the ty res are worn. z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which has not b een used for six years should be used w ith ca re. z Never fit used tyres the prev ious history and use of w hich y ou do not know.
1)
TWI = T rea d W ear In dica to r.
Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3
Run-fla t tyres have reinforced, selfsup porting sidewalls, w hich ensure that the tyres a lways have a certain amount of driveability, ev en when there is no p ressure. Run-fla t tyres are only permitted on vehic les with ES PP lu s and Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem or Deflation Detection Sy stem. Dr iving with a dama ged tyr e A loss in tyre pressure is ind icated by the Ty re Pressure Monitoring System 3 or the Deflation Detection S ystem 3. If a tyre has no pressure, continued driving is p ossible z at a sp eed of max. 50 mph (80 k m/h), z up to a distance of 50 miles (80 k m).
163
If the max im um perm issible speed for the winter ty res is less than that of the v ehicle, a notice indicating the m aximum permissible sp eed for the tyres must b e affixed within the drivers field of v ision 1). If y ou use the spare wheel when it is fitted with a summer tyre, the vehicles driveability m ay be affected, especia lly on slippery road surfaces. Ob tain a replacem ent for the faulty ty re as soon as possible, and ha ve the wheel balanced and fitted to the v ehicle.
9 Warning
Check ty re pressures regularly even if runflat ty res are fitted. Check tyre pressures a t least ev ery 14 day s and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold. Dep ending on tyre manufacturer, run-fla t tyres c an be identified from a marking on the ty re wa ll. E. g. RO F = RunonFlat for Goodyear or SSR = Self Supporting Runflat Tyre for Continental. Run-fla t tyres ma y only be used in combination with Vauxhall-app rov ed alloy wheels; this a lso app lies to winter tyres.
9 Warning
When driving w ith a flat tyre, do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 k m/h) or a distance of 50 miles (80 km). The vehicle will be more difficult to steer and handle and the b ra king dista nce will be longer. Adapt driving sty le and speed to the conditions at hand. Do not use a tyre repa ir kit. Deflation Detection S ystem 3 see page 154, Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3 see page 155.
Whe el trims 3
If the wheel trims and tyres used are not Vauxhall-approved, ma ke sure that the tyres do not have a beaded edg e see page 160.
Tyre chains 3
Winter tyres 3
For notes on fitting new ty res see p age 159. See pag e 220 for restrictions. Winter tyres (M + S ty res) im prov e safety at temperatures below 7 C a nd should therefore be fitted on all the w heels. The design of summer tyres means they ha ve lim ited qualities for winter driving.
Restrictions and further information see page 220.

1)
Varies from coun try to coun try on a ccount of nationa l regu la tion s.
164
Tyre c hains are only permitted on the drive wheels (front ax le). They must be fitted to the ty res sy mmetrica lly in order to achieve a concentric fit. Always use fine mesh chains that add no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock). Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into contact with parts of the chain and be dam aged. Rem ove the wheel trim see page 176. Tyre chains m ay only be used at speed s up to 30 mph (50 k m/h) and, when travelling on roads that are free of snow, they ma y b e used for brief periods only sinc e they are sub ject to rapid wear on a hard road and may snap . Temporar y spare w heel 3 Tyre chains m ust not be used on the tem porary spare wheel. If you need to use tyre chains a fter suffering a flat front ty re, fit the temporary spare on the rear axle and transfer one of the rear wheels to the front axle. For notes on the tem pora ry spare w heel see page 176. Wheel chang ing see page 176. Correct tyre pressure. Deflation Detection System 3 see page 154, Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 see page 155.
Roof racks 3
V ersion with roof railing 3
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly. For safety reasons and to av oid dam age to the roof, we recomm end that y ou use the Vauxhall roof rack sy stem approved for your vehicle. Fasten the roof ra ck follow ing the instructions that accompa ny the system . Driv ing hints see pa ge 142.
Version without roof railing
To attach the roof ra ck mounting bolts in the holes shown in the d ia gram, see the enc losed instruction for the roof ra ck system.
Towing equipment 3
9 Warn ing
Disregard of these instruc tions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly. Use only towing equipment that has been app rov ed for your v ehicle. We recommend entrusting the fitting of tow ing equipment at a later d ate to a workshop, whose personnel will be able to adv ise you on any possible towed load increa ses. The workshop will have instructions on how to insta ll the towing equipment and make any
Lift the covers from the fitting openings. Attac h roof rack at appropriate points, see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions.
necessary chang es to the v ehicle that affect the cooling sy stem, heat shields or other equipment.
165
9 Warning
When op erating without a trailer, remove the c oupling ba ll bar. For installation dimensions of the tra iler towing equipm ent see page 227.
Disengage and fold d ow n the soc ket. Remove the sea ling plug from the hole for the coupling ball bar and stow it in the luggage compa rtm ent. C heck ing the tensioning of the coupl ing ba ll bar
Stowage of coupling ball bar

When inserting, ensure that the rotary ha ndle of the c oupling b all bar is facing up wards.
Fitting the coupling ball bar

z Red marking on turn knob points tow ards white mark ing on coupling b all bar. z Gap of approx . 6 millimetres between rotary knob and c oupling b all bar. The c oupling ba ll bar is stored in a b ag, stra pped into the left side of the stow age compartment in the luggage com partment floor beneath a cover with a rubber strap. Lift the carpeting to open the hatch. Raise, rotate a nd lift the ring. z Key is in lock at position 1. O therwise, the coupling ball bar must b e tensioned b efore it is inserted into the coupling housing:
166

With other v ersions 3 a cover in the bumper m ust be rem oved before inserting the coupling ball ba r: pull out cover from below at recesses (at an angle, towards the rear) and store in the luggage compartment. Insert the tensioned c oupling ba ll bar into the coupling housing and push firmly up wards until the coupling b all ba r audibly engages in position. The turn knob snap s b ack into its hom e position resting against the coupling ball bar. Lock coupling ball b ar (key to position 2 see page 165, Fig. 17222 T). Remove key and p ress p rotective fla p into position. When the coup ling ball bar is locked the turn knob can no longer be p ulled out.
Important
C heck tha t the coupling ball bar is correctly insta lled: z Green marking on turn knob points tow ards white mark ing on coupling b all bar. z No gap between turn knob and c oupling ball bar. z Coupling ball ba r must b e sea ted firmly in coup ling housing. z Coupling ball ba r must b e locked and key must be removed.
z Unlock coup ling ball bar (key to position 1) see Fig . 17222 T. z Pull turn knob out and then turn it cloc kwise as far as it will g o see Fig. 17223 T. Inserting t he c oup ling ba ll bar
9 Warning
Do not touch the turn knob when inserting the coupling b all bar risk of injury.
9 Warn ing
Tow ing a carav an / trailer is permitted only when a coup ling ball bar is fitted correctly. If the coupling ball b ar d oes not engage correctly, seek the a ssistance of a workshop.
Eye for break-away stopping cable
In the c ase of caravans / trailers with brake, attach the break -away stopping ca ble to the eye (arrow in Fig. 17225 T).
Dismounting the coupling ball bar
167
Caravan / trailer towing

Caravan and traile r loads
1)
The permissible caravan / trailer load s a re vehicle-dependent and eng ine-dependent maximum values which must not be exc eeded. The actual caravan / tra iler load is the difference between the actual g ross weight of the caravan / trailer a nd the actual coupling socket load w ith the caravan / trailer c oupled. When the caravan / trailer load is being checked , therefore, only the carav an / trailer wheels and not the jock ey wheel m ust be standing on the weighing app aratus. Unlock coupling ball b ar (key to position 1 see pa ge 165, Fig . 17222 T). Pull out turn knob a nd turn clock wise as far as it will go. Pull coup ling ball bar down out of the coupling housing. For coupling ball bar storage see page 165. Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball ba r. Fold away the socket see page 165, Fig. 17221 T. With other versions 3 Replace cover in bumper: insert guides of cov er into bumper, first from the front, then from the rea r, and eng age. Compress cov er in a slig htly bent p osition whilst doing this. Do not use steam-jet clea ners or other high-pressure cleaners to c lean the coupling ball ba r. The permissible caravan / trailer load s for your vehicle are given in the vehicle docum ents. Unless otherwise stated, they are v alid for gradients up to ma x. 12%. The permitted trailer load must only be used by drivers with adequate experience driving large or heavy trailers. The permitted c aravan / trailer load applies up to the specified incline and up to an altitude of 1000 m etres above sea-level. Since engine power decreases as altitude increases because of the air b ecoming thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability , the permitted towing w eight also decreases by 10% for ev ery 1000 metres of additiona l altitude. The towing weig ht does not ha ve to b e reduced when driving on road s w ith slight inclines (less than 8%, e.g. motorways).
The actual caravan / trailer loa d plus the actual Gross Vehic le Weight of the tow vehicle m ust not exceed the maxim um permitted towing weight. For example, if the permitted Gross Vehicle Weight is utilised, the caravan / tra iler load must only be used until the m aximum permitted towing weight is reached . The maximum permitted towing weight is shown on the identification plate see pa ge 210.
Coupling socket load
The coupling socket load is the load exerted by the ca ra van / trailer on the coupling ball. It can be va ried by changing the weight distribution when loading the carav an / tra iler. The m aximum permissible coupling socket load (75 kg) is specified on the towing equipment identifica tion plate and in the vehicle d oc um ents. Always aim for the ma ximum load, especially in the case of hea vy ca ravans / trailers. The coupling socket loa d should never fall below 25 kg. When measuring the coupling socket load , ma ke sure that the drawbar of the loaded carav an / trailer is a t the same height as it will be when the carav an / trailer is coupled with the towing vehic le loa ded. Particularly important for carav ans / trailers with tandem ax le.
Rear axle load during towing
1)
Obs erve na tiona l reg ula tio ns.
When the caravan / trailer is coupled and the tow ing vehicle fully loaded (including all occupa nts), the permissib le rear axle load (see identification plate or vehicle documents) ma y be ex ceeded by 90 kg
168

TS A is a func tion of the Electronic S tability Program me (ESP Pl us) see pag e 148. Turn signal control indicators see page 85. Parking distance sensors 3 are deactivated when towing. Handling is greatly influenced by the loading of the caravan / trailer. Load s should therefore b e sec ured so that they cannot slip and be placed in the centre of the caravan / trailer if p ossible, i.e. above the axle. For trailers with less driving stability and carav ans w ith a perm itted Gross Vehicle Weight of m ore than 1300 kg a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) m ust not be ex ceeded ; the use of an anti-rolling device that uses the friction principle is recommended. In the case of caravans / trailers with brakes, atta ch break away stopping ca ble to eye. Do not drive faster than 50 mp h (80 km/h) if possible, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted. Mak e sure that y ou ha ve enoug h room when cornering and avoid sudden ma noeuv res. If the caravan / trailer starts to sway , drive more slowly , do not attem pt to correct the steering and brake sha rp ly if necessary . If it is necessary to apply the brak es fully , depress the brak e pedal a s hard as possible. Remem ber that the braking d istance for vehicles towing carava ns / trailers w ith and without brake is always greater than the brak ing distance for vehicles not towing a carav an / tra iler.
and the Gross Vehicle Weight rating by 75 kg . I f the perm issible rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mp h (100 km/h). applies. If national reg ulations specify a lower maximum speed for vehic les towing a carav an / tra iler, this must be observed .
Driving characteristics , towing tips
Tyre pressure
Increa se the ty re pressure on the tow ing vehic le to the value specified for a full load see page 220. Chec k the p ressure of the spare wheel and ca ra van / trailer wheels.
Before a tta ching the carava n / trailer, lubricate the ball of the ca ra van / trailer tow ing devic e. H ow ever, do not do so if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ba ll, is being used to damp snaking. Check caravan / trailer lighting b efore starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the vehicle are deactiv ated w hen towing a caravan or trailer. Tra ilers with LED turn signals must ha ve a fa cility that makes light monitoring possible in a sim ilar way to conv entiona l filam ent bulbs.
Trailer Stability As sis t 3 (TSA)
TSA m onitors vehicle movements when towing a ca ravan or trailer. If the system detects lurching m ov ements, eng ine p ow er is reduced and the vehicle / trailer combination is selectively b ra ked until the lurching ceases.
When driving downhill, the brakes a re under considerab ly m ore load when towing a cara van / trailer. For this reason, drive in the same gear as if driv ing uphill and drive at a similar speed. Autom atic transm ission 3 or Ea sy tronic 3 in Autom atic mode will automatically select the driving prog ra mme with the optimum engine brak ing effect. As necessary, gear 3, 2 or 1 c an also be manually selected. The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is generated at high engine sp eed s a nd less at slower speeds, d o not shift down when climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping with the g ra dient in the higher gea r. For vehicles with manual transmission, the most favourable engine speed when starting-off on an incline is between 2500 a nd 3000 rpm for petrol engines and between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine speed constant, engage clutch gradually (let slip), release ha ndb ra ke and open throttle. If possible, the engine speed should not drop d uring this procedure. For vehicles with autom atic tra nsmission 3 or Easytronic 3 it suffices to apply full throttle in Automatic mode. Before starting-off under ex treme conditions (high c om bination w eight, mountainous terrain with steep inc lines), switch off all unnecessary elec trica l loa ds (e.g. heated rear wind ow , air conditioning sy stem 3, heated front seats 3).
169
Starting on inclines
170
Self-help, Vehicle Care

Diesel fuel system, bleeding . .... .... ..... . Bonnet ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Starting .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Starting the engine with jump lead s 3 Towing ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Warning triangle 3, First aid kit (cushion) + 3 . .... .... ..... . Jac k 3 and vehic le tools.. .... .... ..... . Spa re wheel 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Changing wheels . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Tyre repair kit 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuses and the most important c ircuits they protect. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Halogen headlight system .... .... .... ..... . Xenon headlight system 3, Ad aptive Forward Lighting (AFL) system 3 .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Front fog lights 3 . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Rear lights ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Numb er plate light .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Courtesy lig ht .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle care. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 170 170 171 171 172 174 174 175 176 179 182 184 187 188 191 192 192 193 194 195
Diesel fuel system, bleeding
Nev er let the tank run dry ! If c ontrol indica tor Y illuminates, refuel as soon a s possible. Refuel immediately if it fla shes. Restarting is p ossible a fter running the tank dry. Ex pect d elayed starting . Turn ov er the ignition three times for 15 seconds at a time. Then start the engine for a maximum of 40 sec onds. If the eng ine fails to start, repeat this process after no less than 5 sec onds. I f the eng ine still fails to start, seek the assistance of a workshop.
Bonnet
There is a safety catch on the undersid e of the bonnet: lift this upwa rd s a nd open the bonnet. Dirt on snow on the bonnet can slide onto the windsc reen when opened and block the air intake. Air intake see pag e 130.
To op en the bonnet, pull the release lever loca ted on the driver s side below the instrument panel. The bonnet will then be unlocked and w ill op en partially. Return relea se lev er to its origina l position.
Self-help, V ehicle Care

Vehicle w ith the O pen&S ta rt system 3 must not b e started by pushing or towing if the battery is d ischarged, since the steering colum n lock cannot be relea sed. The vehicle can only b e started using jump leads, see following section.
171
Starting the engine with jump leads 3
A v ehicle with a discha rg ed battery can be started using jump leads and the battery of another vehicle. Attempts to sta rt the vehicle should be made at interva ls of one minute and should not last longer than 15 sec onds
To lock the bonnet in the open position, insert the rod lying across the radiator into the small slot on the b onnet underside. Press rod firm ly into its holder before closing. Low er the b onnet and allow it to drop into its catch. Check that the bonnet is locked in p osition by pulling at its front edge. If it is not enga ged, repeat the proc edure.
9 Warning
Be ex tremely careful when starting with jump leads. Any d eviation from the following instructions can lead to injuries or dam age caused by battery ex plosion or dam age to the electrical systems of both vehicles.
z Never expose the battery to naked fla mes or sparks. z A disc ha rg ed b attery c an freez e at temperatures of 0 C. Defrost the frozen battery in a warm room before connecting jum p leads. z Do not allow battery fluid to come into contac t with ey es, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. The fluid contains sulphuric acid w hich ca n cause injuries and dama ge in the ev ent of direc t contac t. z Wear eye protection and protec tiv e clothing when handling a battery. z Use auxiliary battery with sam e v olta ge (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) m ust not be considera bly less than that of the discharged ba ttery. Voltage and capacity information can be found on the batteries.
Starting
Do not s tart w ith quick charge r

This p revents da mage to electronic components.
Do not s tart by pushing or towing
Because your vehic le is fitted with a cataly tic conv erter, it must not be started by pushing or towing see p age 146.
172

1. C onnec t one end of the first jump lead to the positive terminal 1 of the battery providing the jum p start (identified b y "+ " sign on battery case or terminal). 2. C onnec t the other end of this lead to the positiv e terminal 2 of the discharged battery ("+" sig n). 3. C onnec t the first end of the other jum p lead to the negative terminal 3 of the battery providing the sta rt (" " sign). 4. C onnec t the other end of the second jump lead 4 to ground on the other vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. z Do not connect leads to negative term inal of discharged battery! z The connection p oint should be as far away from the discharged battery as possible. z Route the lead s so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compa rtm ent. z Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump . z After 5 minutes, start the other engine. Start attempts should b e m ade for no longer than 15 seconds a t an interval of 1 minute. z After the start, allow both engines to idle for 3 minutes with the leads connected . For fixing of the front towing ey e, op en front right cover strip 3 : disengage strip at bottom, slide to side a nd remove. In another v ersion 3: O pen c ap covering front right tow ing eye socket: Release ca p at b ottom and rem ov e from b elow. The front towing eye is with the tool kit in a bag in a stowage compartment in the luggage compa rtm ent floor. To open the stowage compartment, lift carpet and then lift, turn and pull the tab see p age 174, Fig. 17452 T. z In order to a void ex cess voltage in the electric al sy stem, b efore removing a lead, sw itc h on a n electrica l consumer (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the vehicle receiving the jump sta rt. z Reverse abov e seq uence exac tly when removing leads.
z Use jump leads with insulated terminals and a cross section of a t least 16 mm2 (25 mm2 for diesel engines). z Do not d isconnect the disc ha rg ed battery from the vehicle. z Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. z Do not lean over the battery during jump starting. z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to touch those of the other lead. z The vehicles m ust not com e into conta ct with each other during the jump starting process. z Ap ply handbrake. Ma nual transmission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, autom atic transmission 3 in P.
Towing
Towing your own ve hicle
Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the illustration:

Driv e slowly. Do not driv e jerkily. Excessive tra ctiv e force can dam age the vehicle.
173
Towing se rvice
9 Warning
For braking and steering, significa ntly higher forces a re required: b ra ke assistance and steering a ssistance are effective only with the engine running. To prev ent the entry of exhaust fumes from the towing vehic le, switch on the air recirculation 3 and close the windows. Screw in the front towing eye anticlock wise as far as it will go until it stops in a horiz ontal position. Attach a tow rope 3 or better still a tow rod 3 to the ey e. The front towing eye must only be used for towing and not recov ering a vehicle. Switch on ignition see pag e 9, to release steering column lock and to permit opera tion of brak e lights, horn and windscreen wiper. Vehicles with the Open&S tart sy stem 3 must not be towed when the battery is discharged because the steering column lock ca nnot be released. Tow ing is only possible with the ignition switched on. Use jump leads to start the engine if necessary see page 171. Manual transm ission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, a utomatic tra nsmission 3 in N. Vehicles with autom atic transm ission 3 should be tow ed facing forwards only and must not be towed faster than 50 m ph (80 km/h) or further tha n 60 miles (100 km ). If the transmission is defectiv e, or if the above speed or distance is to be exc eeded, the front axle must b e raised off the ground. Seek the assistance of a workshop. If the automatic clutch in v ehicles with Easytronic 3 is released manua lly in the event of interrup tion of power supp ly, tow ing is not permitted see page 135. In this case, seek the immediate assistance of a workshop. After tow ing, unscrew the front towing ey e cloc kwise and refit the cover.
Entrust your vehicle only to the towing service of your choice and obtain an estimate on towing costs before employing any tow ing service. In this way y ou avoid unnecessary c osts and possible insurance problems during claim processing.
Towing another vehicle
To open the cover concealing the rear towing eye sock et at the rear rig ht of the vehicle: disengag e the cover at the bottom and p ull it off d ownwa rd s. The rear towing eye is with the tool k it in a bag in a stowage compartment in the luggage compa rtm ent floor. To open the stowage compartment, lift carpet and then lift, turn and pull the tab see p age 174, Fig. 17452 T.
174
Warning triangle 3, First aid kit (cushion) + 3
The jack a nd the v ehicle tools are in a ba g, strapped into a stowa ge c om partment in the floor of the luggage compartment with a rubb er strap.
Screw in the rear towing eye anticloc kwise as far as it will go until it stops in a horiz ontal position. The rigid lashing eye at the rear undernea th the vehicle must never b e used as a towing eye. Attach a tow rope 3 or better still a tow rod 3 to the ey e. The rear towing eye must only be used for towing and not recov ering a vehicle. Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Ex cessive tractive forc e ca n damage the vehicle. After towing, unscrew the rear tow ing eye clockwise and refit the cover.
Insert the warning triangle a nd the first-aid kit (cushion) in the reta ining straps of the tailg ate inner panelling.
Jack 3 and vehicle tools
To open the stowage compartment, lift the rear carpeting then raise, rotate and pull the ring. To close it, insert the lugs on the front rim of the lid into the recesses and lock into place.
175
Spare wheel 3
z Lift the spa re wheel holder, insert the safety cab le. z Lift the spa re wheel holder and engag e in the catch. The open side of the ca tc h must p oint in the direction of travel.
The spare wheel is kept beneath the vehic le. Instead of a sp are wheel the vehicle may be eq uipp ed w ith a tyre repair k it see page 179. z Open tool kit storage compa rtm ent in lugga ge c om partment floor see pa ge 174, Fig . 17452 T. z Fully release the hex agon bolt in the stowage compartm ent floor using the wheel bolt wrench. z Lift the spare wheel holder. z Unhook the catch and lower the spare wheel.
z Deta ch the safety cable. z Lower holder all the w ay and remove spare wheel. z Place replaced w heel in spare wheel holder w ith outside of w heel fac ing upwards. Wheel changing see page 176. z Turn the hexag on b olt in the stow age compartment floor with the wheel bolt wrench to raise the sp are w heel holder all the wa y up. z Close and lock stowa ge com partment cover.
General information
Depending on version, the spare w heel ma y be in the form of a temp orary sp are wheel 3 . Refer to the notes in this section and on p ages 164, 179, 220. O n vehicles with alloy wheels 3, the sp are wheel m ay have a steel rim.
176

and a rear wheel to the front. Check tyre pressure and adjust if necessary see page 220. z Follow temporary spa re wheel instructions on pag es 164, 179 and 220. z Park the vehic le on a lev el, firm and nonskid surface. z Switch on hazard warning lig hts, ap ply ha nd brake, for manual transmission or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse gear, for autom atic transmission 3 selector lever in P. z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle 3. Wa rning triangle see page 174. z Remov e spare wheel see pa ge 175. z Before ra ising the vehicle, set the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. z Never change more tha n one wheel at once. z Block wheel that is diagonally opp osite to wheel being cha nged by placing wedg es or the lik e in front of and behind the wheel. z Use the ja ck 3 only to change w heels. z If the ground on which the vehicle is standing is soft, a solid board (max . 1 cm thick ) should be placed under the jack 3. Using a thicker board could damage the jack 3 and the v ehicle. z No people or a nima ls m ay be in the vehicle when it is jack ed-up. z Never cra wl und er a ja cked-up vehicle. z Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack.
If y ou use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel may still be fitted with a summer tyre. I f you use the spare wheel the vehicles ha nd ling may be altered. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the vehic le. The spare wheel may be fitted with a smaller ty re and a smaller rim tha n the other wheels on the v ehicle: using the sp are wheel m ay a lter the handling of the vehicle. Replace a defective tyre as soon as possible, bala nce the wheel and have it mounted on the vehicle.
Notes on directional tyres 3
Ty re w ith a prescribed rotating direction can only achiev e their maxim um performance if they a re fitted in the prescribed rotating d irection. If a tyre or spare wheel is fitted that is rotating in the wrong direction due to a puncture, the following must be noted: z The handling of the vehicle may be different. Replace defective tyres a s soon as possible, have wheel ba la nced and fitted to the vehicle. z Do not drive faster than 50 m ph (80 k m/h). z Drive particularly carefully on wet and snow-c ov ered road surfac es. z For more information on tyres with a p rescribed rotating direction see page 163.
Notes on temporary spare whe el 3
z Using a temporary spa re wheel m ay cha nge the driving behav iour of the vehicle, particularly if using winter ty res 3. Replace defective tyre as quic kly as possible, balance wheel and fit to vehicle. z Fit only one temp orary sp are wheel. z Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). z Ta ke c urv es slowly . z Do not use for a lengthy period. z Replace tem pora ry spare wheel with full specification w heel without delay. z Ty re chains are not permitted on the temporary spare wheel. If tyre c hains a re necessary after a front wheel puncture, fit the temporary sp are wheel to the rear
Changing wheels
There m ay be a tyre rep air kit instead of a spare wheel see page 179. To ensure your safety, make the following preparations and observe the following information when c hanging w heels:

z Before screw ing in the wheel bolts when cha nging a w heel, you must apply a light coa ting of grease to the wheel bolts. Keep a standard commercial grease with you for this rea son.
177
2. Turn wheel b olts half a turn using the wheel bolt wrench 3 , pushing the wrench 3 on a s far a s p ossible.
Alloy wheels 3: Diseng age wheel bolt caps with a screwdriver and rem ove. To protect the wheel, p la ce a soft cloth between the screwd riv er and the alloy wheel. 1. Pull off wheel trim with hook provided in toolkit 3. For vehicle tools see pa ge 174. With wheel trims with visible wheel bolts 3 the trim ca n rem ain on the wheel. Retaining washers 3 on wheel b olts must not be removed .
3. The location of eac h ja cking point 3 is ind ic ated by a ma rk on the bottom edge of the vehicle. For v ehicles with side skirt trims 3 , the jack 3 may not b e used as it may damage the vehicle.
178

5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wip e clean with a cloth. Then apply a light coating of grea se to the wheel b olts. Do not grea se the threa d of the b olts. Do not put the w heel bolts down in a location where they may becom e soiled. If the wheel bolts hav e retaining washers 3, they m ust not be remov ed. 6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare wheel see p age 175. Notes on tem pora ry spare wheel see page 176. 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slig htly, inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 8. Low er vehicle. 9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 10. Before refitting the wheel cov er clean the w heel a round the retaining clips. Valve symb ol 3 on ba ck of w heel cover must point tow ards valve on wheel. Align and refit w heel trim or wheel bolt caps 3. Alloy wheels 3: Align a nd refit wheel bolt caps 3 . 11. Stow the remov ed w heel, tools and warning triangle 3 see pages 174, 175. 12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted w heel. Adjust as nec essary .
4. Before positioning the jack 3, set it to the necessary heig ht b y rotating the eye by hand. Position the jack 3 at the front or rear so that the jack claw spans the vertical b ase and grips in the recess in the v ertical base. Mak e sure it is properly positioned. The jack b ase must be on the ground directly b elow the jacking point in a manner that prevents it from slipping .
Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and turn crank to raise v ehicle. If this is not the case, carefully lower the vehicle immediately and rep osition the ja ck.

13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts on the new w heel checked on the vehicle using a torque wrenc h as soon as possible a nd, if necessary, corrected. Tightening torq ue see p age 220. 14. Repla ce changed, defective tyre with a new one. 15. Repla ce temporary spare wheel 3 with a full sp ecification wheel without delay. 16. Initia lise the Defla tion Detection System 3 or Ty re Pressure Monitoring System 3 see pages 154, 155.
179
Tyre repair kit 3
Minor d amage to the ty re tread or side wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, ca n be repaired using the tyre repair k it (does not a pply to run-flat tyres). Do not remove foreign bodies from the tyres. Damaged areas bigger than 4 m m and damage at the ty re rim cannot be repaired using the ty re repair kit.
9 Warning
Driving with low ty re pressures or depressurised ty res may lea d to invisible tyre dama ge. This dam age cannot b e rec tified using the tyre repair k it. Turn off your vehicle a nd seek the assistance of a workshop . For important information see page 181. If you have a flat ty re: z Sw itch on haz ard warning lights, apply handbrake, automatic transmission 3 selector lever in park position P, with manual transmission or Easytronic 3 eng age 1st gear or reverse gear. z C orrectly set up the warning triangle 3. Warning tria ngle see page 174. The tyre repair kit is in a stowage compa rtm ent on the right in the lug gage compa rtm ent. To open the compa rtm ent, push locking tabs forwards and remove cover.
1. Take the sealant bottle and bracket with air hose from the com partment.
180
2. Detach air hose from bracket and screw onto sealant b ottle connection.
4. Unscrew d ust cap from defective tyre. 5. Sc rew ty re inflation hose to valve.
8. Swivel up the accessory soc ket at the right rear side of the luggage compartment and insert plug of tyre repair k it. To avoid discharging the b attery, we recommend running the engine.
3. Position sealant bottle on brack et as illustrated a bove. Make sure that the bottle does not fall.
6. Sc rew air hose onto compressor connection. 7. Sw iv el c ov er of electrical connection upwards from the left, see arrow in Fig. 17944 T, and d isconnect plug.

9. Press b utton < on the compressor. The tyre is filled with sea lant. 10. The compressor p ressure gauge briefly ind ica tes up to 6 ba r (87 psi) whilst the sealant bottle is emptying (approx. 30 seconds). Then the pressure starts to drop . 11. All of the sealant is pumped into the tyre. Then the ty re is inflated. 12. The prescribed tyre pressure see page 220, should be ob ta ined within 10 m inutes. When the correct pressure is ob ta ined, switch off the com pressor by p ressing button < aga in. If the p rescribed tyre pressure is not achieved within 10 minutes, the tyre is too heavily damaged. Turn off your vehicle and seek the assistanc e of a workshop. Release excess t yre p ressure using button ]. Do not run the compressor for more tha n 10 minutes, see " Important information" on pa ge 181. 13. Disconnect plug from a ccessory socket, place in p lug compartment and remov e tyre repair kit. Push catch on brack et to remove seala nt b ottle from brack et. Screw tyre inflating hose to free connection of sealant bottle. This prev ents sealant from escaping. Stow tyre repair k it in lugga ge compartment. 14. Rem ov e a ny ex cess sealant using a cloth. 15. C olla pse wa rning triangle 3 and stow in luggag e com partment see pa ge 174. 16. Attach the stick er containing the m aximum p ermitted sp eed that is affixed to the sealant bottle w ithin the driv ers field of view. For sticker see pag e 180, Fig. 17469 T. 17. C ontinue driving immediately so that sea lant is ev enly distributed in the ty re. After driving approx. 6 miles (10 km) but no more than 10 m inutes, stop and check ty re pressure. Screw compressor air hose directly onto tyre valv e and com pressor when doing this. As long as the ty re pressure is m ore than 1.3 bar (19 psi), it may be a djusted to the prescribed value. Repeat the procedure until there is no m ore loss of pressure. I f the tyre pressure has fallen below 1.3 bar (19 psi), the vehicle must not be used. Seek the assistance of a workshop. 18. S tow away tyre repair k it behind cover on right in side panelling in luggage com partment. To close, insert cover at rear and engage in panelling.
181
Important
9 Warn ing
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km /h). Do not use for a lengthy period. Steering and handling may be affected. The driving characteristics of the rep aired tyre is sev erely affec ted, therefore have this tyre rep la ced. If unusual noise is heard or the compressor becomes hot, turn compressor off for at least 30 minutes. The built-in safety valve opens at a pressure of 7 bar (102 psi). Protect c om pressor from m oisture and rain. The sea la nt can only be stored for approx . 4 years, after w hich tim e its sealing cap ability is no longer guaranteed. Pay attention to stora ge information on sealant b ottle. The sealant bottle ca n only be used once. Replace used sealant bottle. The compressor and sealant can be used from app rox . -30 C.
182
Dispose of used tyre repa ir kits in accordance with the a pplicable laws. The a dapters supplied 3 can be used to pump up other items e.g. footballs, air mattresses, inflatable dinghies etc. When using the tyre repair kit, no consumers may be c onnec ted to the front accessory sock et.
Electrical system
9 Warning
Electronic ignition systems use a very high voltage. Do not touch the ignition system; danger to life.
A blown fuse (see the following illustrations) c an be recognised by its melted wire. Do not install a new fuse until the cause of the fault has been remedied.
Fuse s
The vehicle has two fuseb ox es: one behind a cover on the left side of the luggag e compartment and one in the front left of the engine compartment.
Different ty pes of fuse are used. Fuse colour Brow nish yellow Brow n Red Blue Yellow Tra nsparent Green Fuse rating 5A 7.5 A 10 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A
We rec om mend that you keep a complete set of fuses in the vehicle. Store spare fuses in the fusebox in the lugg age compartment. Open the cov er see p age 184. Before replacing a fuse, turn off the respective switch and the ignition.

There is a fuse extractor in the lug gage compartment fusebox to facilitate replacement of fuses see Fig. 17258 T for a n exa mple.
183
Fuse colour Blue Transparent Pink Green
Fuse rating 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A
Place the fuse extractor on the v arious typ es of fuse from the top or side, and withdraw fuse. O nly install fuses of the specified rating. each fuse has its rating w ritten on it, in add ition the fuses are colour coded.
184

Fuse box ve rsion A Fusebox version B
Fuses and the most important circuits they protect

Fusebox in luggage compartment
The fusebox is on the left in the lug gage compartment behind a cover. To open the compartment, push locking tabs forwards and remove cover. Do not store any objects behind the cover. Dep ending on the equipment version, there are two different fuseboxes in the luggage compartment for differing electrical circuits. z Version A see Fig. 18504 T z Version B see Fig. 17958 T Spa re fuses, fuse extrac tor see p age 182.
Some functions can be protected by several fuses. Pry off relev ant cap to cha ng e the fuse. No. Ci rcuit 1 Front fog lights 2 Rear sock et 3 Lug gage compartment soc ket 4 Reversing lights 5 Electric windows, rear 6 Air conditioning system 7 Electric windows, front 8 Heated exterior mirrors Rating 15 A 15 A 15 A 7.5 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 7.5 A S om e functions are protected by several fuses. No. C ircuit R ating 25 A 7.5 A 1 Electric wind ows, front 2 3 I nstruments

No. C ircuit 4 Heating, air c onditioning system, Electronic Climate C ontrol (EC C) 5 Airbags 6 7 8 9 10 11 Heated rear wind ow 12 Rear window wip er 13 Parking d istance sensors 14 Heating, air c onditioning system 15 16 S eat occupancy recognition, O pen&Start system 17 Rain sensor, air quality sensor, Tyre Pressure Monitoring System , interior mirror 18 Instrum ents, switc hes 19 20 C DC 21 Heated ex terior mirrors 22 23 Electric windows, rear 24 Diagnostics p lug 25 Ra ting 5A No. Circ uit 26 Electrically retra ctable ex terior mirrors 27 Ultrasonic sensor, Va ux ha ll alarm system 28 29 Cigarette lighter, front socket 30 Rea r socket 31 32 33 Op en&Start system 34 35 Rea r socket 36 Towing equipm ent 37 38 Central loc king sy stem, terminal 30 39 Seat heater (left) 40 Seat heater (right) 41 5A 10 A 7.5 A 25 A 7.5 A 42 43 44 Rati ng 7. 5 A 5A 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 15 A 15 A
185
Fusebox in e ngine compartm ent
7.5 A 25 A 15 A 5A 7.5 5A 5A
The fusebox is at the front left of the engine compa rtm ent.
9 Warn ing
Turn off engine before opening engine compartment fusebox ; risk of injury see page 201. To open the cover, release the catch by inserting a screwdriver into the opening as far as it will g o a nd swivelling it to the side. O pen the cover up wards and rem ove. Depending on the equip ment variant there are two different fuse assignments in the eng ine compartm ent fusebox that cover different power c ircuits: z If fusebox va ria nt A is in the lugg age compartment see Fig . 18504 T, page 184, the version A fuse assignments app ly , see nex t page.
186

Some functions are protected by sev eral fuses. No. Ci rcuit 1 ABS 2 ABS 3 Interior fan, Electronic Clim ate C ontrol (ECC) 4 Interior fan, heating , air conditioning system 5 Cooling fan 1 (dep ending on engine) 6 Cooling fan 2 (dep ending on engine) 7 Central locking system 8 Wind screen wash system, tailgate 9 Heated rear window, heated exterior m irror 10 Diagnostics plug 11 Instruments 12 Mobile telephone, digital radio, Twin Audio, display 13 Courtesy lig ht 14 Wind screen wiper 15 Wind screen wiper 16 Horn, ABS, brake light switch, air conditioning system 17 Diesel particle filter or air conditioning system Rating 20 A 30 A 40 A 40 A 30 A 40 A 20 30 40 20 A A A A No. Circuit 18 Starter 19 20 Horn 21 Engine electronics 22 Engine electronics 23 Head lig ht range adjustment 24 Fuel pump 25 26 Engine electronics 27 Heating, air conditioning sy stem, air q ua lity sensor 28 29 Electro-hydra ulic power-assisted steering 30 Engine electronics 31 Rear w indow wiper 32 Brake lig ht switch 33 Head lig ht range adjustment, light sw itc h, clutch switch, instrum ent, drivers door m od ule 34 Control unit, steering colum n module 35 Infotainment sy stem 36 Cigarette lighter, front socket Rat ing 25 A 15 A 20 A 7.5 A 5A 15 A 10 A 7.5 A 5A 10 A 15 A 5A 5A
z If fuseb ox variant B is in the luggag e com partment see Fig. 17958 T, page 184, the version B fuse assignments apply see following page. Spa re fuses, fuse extrac tor see p age 182.
Ve rsion A fuse assignments
10 A 30 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 5A 30 A 30 A 5A
7.5 A 20 A 15 A
25 A 20 A

Ve rsion B fuse as signments
No. Ci rcuit 4 Interior fan, heating , air conditioning system 5 Cooling fan 1 (dep ending on engine) 6 Cooling fan 2 (dep ending on engine) 7 Wind screen wash system 8 Horn 9 Headlight wash sy stem 10 Em ergency unlocking of central lock ing sy stem 11 12 13 Front fog lights 14 Wind screen wiper Rating 40 A 30 A 40 A 20 30 40 10 A A A A No. Circuit 25 Tra nsmission electronic s 26 Engine electronics 27 Electro-hydra ulic power-assisted steering 28 Tra nsmission electronic s 29 Tra nsmission electronic s
187
Rat ing 15 A 10 A 5A 5A 7.5 A
15 A 25 A 20 A 15 A 30 A
30 Engine electronics 10 A 31 Ad aptive Forward Lig hting, 10 A headlight range ad justment 32 Brake sy stem, air 5A conditioning system, clutch switch 33 Ad aptive Forward Lig hting, 5 A headlight range adjustment, light sw itc h 34 Control unit 7.5 A steering column module 35 Infotainment sy stem 20 A 36 Mobile telephone, digital ra dio, Twin Audio, display 7.5 A
15 Wind screen wiper 30 A 16 Control module electronics, 5 A O pen&Start system, ABS, brake light switch 17 Diesel particle filter heating 25 A 18 Starter 25 A Some functions are protected by severa l fuses. No. C ircuit 1 ABS 2 ABS 3 I nterior fa n, Electronic C limate Control (ECC ) Rat ing 20 A 30 A 40 A 19 Transm ission elec tronics 20 Air conditioning system 21 Engine electronics 22 Engine electronics 30 A 10 A 20 A 7.5 A
Bulb replacement
Before replac ing a bulb, switch ignition off and switch relevant switch off. O nly hold new bulb at base! Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise fingerprints on the glass eva pora te. Residue builds up on the reflector eventually resulting in a dull reflector. Inadv ertently stained bulbs may be cleaned with a clea n lint-free cloth, using alcohol or white spirit.
23 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 10 A head lig ht ra ng e ad justment 24 Fuel pump 15 A
188
Replacem ent bulb m ust be in accordance with d ata on base of defective bulb. Do not exceed wa tta ge g iv en on bulb b ase.
Halogen headlight system
1. Replace bulb through opening in the front wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain access, relea se catch and remove cover see pa ge 187. 2. Remov e headlight protective cover.
The b ulbs of the front exterior lights are rep la ced through openings in the front wheel arch: turn relevant wheels to gain access, release catch and remove cover.
Head lig hts with sep arate systems for ma in beam 1 (inner bulbs) a nd dipped beam 2 (outer b ulbs).
Dippe d beam
3. Rotate left bulb carrier and disengage.
Headlight aiming
We recommend that head light a im ing be carried out by a workshop, who will have special equipment. When aiming y our headlights, the m anual head lig ht range adjustment 3 must be set to 0.

4. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from the reflector.
189
Main be am
1. O pen and support the bonnet. 5. Detach b ulb from bulb mounting. 6. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting, without touching the gla ss. 7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb m ounting eng age in the recesses in the reflector. 8. Rotate b ulb carrier to right as far as it will go. 9. Place headlight protective cover in position and close. 10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch and enga ge. 2. Replace bulbs from engine compa rtm ent side. To rep lace the bulb on the rig ht-hand side, remove the air hose from the air filter. To rep lace the bulb on the left-ha nd side, remove the plug from the fusebox. 3. Remove headlight protectiv e c ov er. 4. Deta ch plug connector from bulb.
5. Disengage sp ring clip from retainer by pressing forwa rd s a nd then swing downward. 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. 7. When fitting a new bulb, eng age the lugs in the rec esses on the reflector without touching the g lass. 8. Engag e sp ring wire clip, p lug connector onto bulb . 9. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in position and close. After bulb replacement on the right-hand side, reattach air hose to air filter and engage. After bulb replacement on the left-hand side, reconnect p lug to fusebox and engage.
190

After bulb replacem ent on the right-hand side, rea tta ch air hose to air filter and engage. After bulb replac ement on the left-hand side, reconnect plug to fusebox and engage.
Parking lights
1. Open and sup port the bonnet. 2. Replace bulbs from engine com partment side. To replace the b ulb on the right-ha nd side, remove the air hose from the air filter. To replace the b ulb on the left-hand side, remove the plug from the fusebox.
Front turn signal lights
1. Open and support the bonnet. 2. Replac e bulb through opening in the front wheel arch: turn relevant w heel to gain access, release catch and remove cover see page 187. 4. Remove parking light bulb holder from reflector.
3. Remove m ain beam headlight protec tiv e cov er. 3. Remov e protective cover.
5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the glass. 7. Insert hold er in reflector. Place hea dlight protectiv e ca p in position and c lose.

7. Insert light holder in reflector, rotate clockwise and enga ge in p osition. 8. Position cover on opening in wheel arch and engage.
191
Xenon headlight system 3, Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) system 3
Xenon headlight system in conjunction with adjustable lighting dep ending on steering deflection.
9 Warning
4. Rotate bulb holder to left and diseng age. 5. Push bulb into socket slig htly, rotate left and remov e. Xenon head lig hts opera te at very hig h voltages. Do not touch, risk of fatal injury. Hav e d ip ped beam , main b eam, sid e lights and parking lights replac ed b y a workshop only . 3. Rotate bulb holder to left and disengage.
Front turn s ignal lights
1. O pen and support the bonnet. 2. Replace bulbs from engine compa rtm ent side. To rep lace the bulb on the rig ht-hand side, remove the air hose from the air filter. To rep lace the bulb on the left-ha nd side, remove the plug from the fusebox. 4. Push bulb into socket slightly , rotate left and rem ov e. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 5. Insert new b ulb, without touching the glass.
192

To c hange the bulbs on the left sid e, take off the luggag e comp artment brack et and cover a nd open the side cover: Push locking tabs forwards and remov e cover.
6. Insert lig ht holder in reflector, rota te cloc kwise and engage in position. After bulb rep la cement on the right-hand side, reattach a ir hose to air filter and engage. After bulb replacement on the left-ha nd side, reconnect plug to fusebox and engage.
Front fog lights 3 Rear lights
Hav e lights replaced b y a w ork shop.
4. Pull b ulb housing backwa rds.
2. C om press plug connector and pull from bulb ca rrier. 3. Unscrew two plastic securing nuts from the inside by hand.
1. To cha nge the bulb s on the right side, op en the side cover: Push locking tab s forwards and remove cover. Remove foam c ontainer and tyre repair kit 3.
5. Diseng age both lock ing tabs from the bulb carrier and remov e bulb carrier.

7. C heck that rear lights are operating correctly after bulb replacement: Switch on ignition Op erate brake Switch on park ing lights
193
Number plate light
Bulbs in bulb holder: 1 2 3 4 = = = = Ta il light / b ra ke light Turn signal light Fog tail lig ht Reversing light
2. Remov e bulb housing downw ard, taking care not to p ull on the cable. 3. Lift flap a nd disc onnec t plug from bulb socket.
6. Remove bulb from socket. Insert new bulb without touching the glass. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing. Engag e plug c onnec tor. Insert bulb housing in v ehicle body and tighten atta chm ent nuts by hand. On the right-hand side, insert foa m container and tyre repair k it 3. Engage cover fla p in lugga ge c om partment. Engage lugga ge c om partment b ra cket. 1. Insert sc rewdriver v ertically in bulb insert as shown in illustration. Press to the sid e and release spring.
4. Rotate bulb socket anticlockwise and disengage. 5. Remov e bulb from socket.
194

Courtesy lights and reading lights above second and third rows of seats
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 7. Insert bulb hold er in bulb housing and turn to the rig ht. 8. Connect plug to b ulb socket. 9. Insert and engag e bulb housing.
Have lights replaced by a workshop .
Glove compartment lighting, luggage compartment lighting, footwell lighting 3
Courtesy light
Front courte sy light, reading lights 3
To ensure that no power is supplied to the lights, close the d oors before rem oving .
2. Press b ulb slightly towards spring clip and rem ov e. 3. Insert new b ulb, without touching the glass. 4. Insert light in opening and engage in position. Close doors or hold down contact switch before removing lights so that they are not liv e. 1. Prise the lig ht out with a screwdriver. 1. Disenga ge lens b y hand at loca tion shown in illustration, press it downward slightly and remove at a downward ang le. 2. Remove bulb from socket. 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 4. Mount lens and engage in position.
Instrument illumination, Information display illumination 3

Hav e lights rep la ced by a workshop.
195
Vehicle care
Vehicle care aids 3
When caring for your vehicle, observe all nationa l environmental regulations, particularly when washing it. Regula r, thorough care helps to imp rov e the a ppearance of your vehicle and maintain its v alue ov er the y ears. I t is also a prerequisite for warranty claim s for any paint or corrosion dam age. The following pages conta in tips for vehicle ca re which, if used properly, w ill help comb at the unavoidable damag ing effects of the env ironment.
Vehicle wash: z Wash brush, z C ar Shampoo, z C ar Sponges, z Insect Removal Sponge, z Wheel Cleaners, z Engine Cleaners, z Glass Clea ners, z C ham ois Lea ther. Vehicle care: z Paintwork Cleaner, z Paintwork Polish, z C ream Polish, z Metallic Paintw ork Wax, z Hard wax, z Touch-up stick, z Touch-U p / Aerosol Paint, z Wheel Preserver, z Insect Remover, z Alloy Wheel Cleaner, z Alloy Wheel Preserver, z Rust Preventa tiv e, z Vauxhall De-icer Spray , z Window Cleaning Spray , z Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent, z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals, z C leaner.
Washing
The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to env ironmental influenc es, e.g. c ontinuous changes in w eather conditions, industrial waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so wash a nd wax your vehicle regularly . When using autom atic car wa shes, select a programm e w hich includes w axing. Bird d ropp ings, dead insec ts, resin, pollen and the like should be cleaned off imm ediately, a s they contain aggressive constituents which can ca use paint dam age. If using an automatic ca r wash, comply with the pertinent instructions of the car wash manufacturer. The wind screen wiper and rear window wip er must be sw itc hed off see pages 11, 12. Rem ov e antenna 3 and roof rack 3. S tand on the door sill to reach them more easily . If y ou wash your vehicle by hand, make sure that the insides of the wings are also thoroughly rinsed out. C lean edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the a reas they cover. Thoroughly rinse off a nd leather-off the vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use sepa ra te leathers for paint and window surfac es: rem nants of wax on the windows will im pair vision. O bserve national regulations.
196

Wheels
Use a p H-neutral wheel clea ning a gent to clean the wheels. Wheels are painted a nd can be treated with the sam e agents as the body . For a lloy wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel Preserver.
Waxing
Wax y our vehicle regularly, in particula r after it ha s b een washed using shampoo and at the latest when water no longer forms bead s on the paintwork, otherwise the p aintwork will dry out. Also wax edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the areas they cover.
Whe els and tyre s
Do not use high-pressure jet c leaners on wheels and tyres.
Interior and upholste ry
C lean the vehicle interior, including the instrument panel fac ia , using interior cleaner. The instrument panel should only b e cleaned using a soft damp cloth. C lean fabric upholstery w ith a vacuum cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use cleaner tha t is suitable for both fabrics and vinyl. Do not use cleaning agents suc h as acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, paint remover, nail varnish remover, washing powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable. O pen v elcro fasteners on clothing could dam age seat upholstery . Ma ke sure that velcro fasteners are closed.
Polishing
Paintwork dam age
Polishing is necessary only if the paint has become dull or if solid deposits have become attached to it. Paintwork polish w ith silicone forms a protective film, making wa xing unnecessary. Plastic b od y parts such as the roof module of the panoramic roof must not be treated with preservation and polishing ag ents. Use M etallic Paintwork Wax on v ehicles with a m etallic-effect paint finish.
Immediately rectify minor p aintwork damage suc h as stone chips, scratches, etc. using a touch-up stic k or Touch-Up / Aerosol Paint before rust ha s a chance to form. If rust has already formed, hav e the cause rectified by a workshop. Note also the surfaces and edges facing the road on whic h rust may develop for a long period of tim e w ithout being noticed.
Exte rior lights
Panoramic roof 3
Never clean w ith solvents or abrasive agents, fuels, agg ressive media (e.g. paint cleaner, a cetone-containing solutions etc.), acidic or highly alk aline media or abrasive pads. No stickers m ay b e ap plied to the panoramic roof, and do not use plastic protector sleeves.
Head lig ht and other protective light covers are m ade of plastic. If they require additiona l cleaning after the vehicle has been washed, clean them with Car Shampoo. Do not use a ny abrasive or caustic a gents, do not use an ice scraper, and do not clea n them dry .
Seat belts
Alway s k eep seat b elts clean a nd dry. C lean only with lukewarm w ater or Cleaner.
Plastic and rubber parts
Windows
For add itional cleaning of plastic and rubb er parts use C leaner. Do not use any other agent, and in particular do not use solvents or petrol. Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners on plastic and rubber p arts.
When cleaning the hea ted rear window, ma ke sure that the heating element on the insid e of the window is not damaged. Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather in conjunction with Window Cleaner a nd Insect R emover. Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent is suita ble for de-icing windows.

For mechanical removal of ice, use a commercially a vailable sharp-edged ice scraper. Press the sc ra per firmly against the g lass so that no dirt can get und er it and scratch the glass. When w ashing the engine with a steam-jet cleaner, do not direc t the steam jet at components of the Anti-lock Brak e Sy stem (ABS ), air conditioning sy stem, Electronic Climate Control (ECC) or the belt d riv e and its comp onents. When washing down the engine, protective wax a pplied afterwards is also removed. Therefore, a fter washing, hav e the engine, parts of the brake system in the engine compartment, axle components and steering and v ehicle body pa rts and cavities preserved thoroughly by a work shop using protective wax . An engine w ash ca n be p erformed in the spring in order to remov e dirt that has adhered to the engine comp artment, whic h may also have a high salt content. Check protectiv e w ax la yer and ma ke good if necessary. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners in the engine c om partment.
197
O n vehicles w hich are washed frequently in automatic c ar washes with underbody washing facility, the protective wax coating may be im paired by dirt-dissolving add itiv es. Therefore, check the underbody a fter washing and have it wax ed if necessary. Before the sta rt of the cold weather season, check the PVC coating and protectiv e wax coating. H ave them restored to perfect condition if necessary. C aution - comm ercially ava ilab le bitum en / rubber materials can damage the PVC coating. We recom mend that y ou ha ve underbody work ca rried out by a workshop. They know the prescribed ma terials and have ex perienc e in the use thereof. The underbody should be washed following the end of the cold weather season to remov e any dirt adhering to the underbody since this may also contain salt. C heck p rotective wax c oa ting and , if nec essary , have it restored to perfec t condition.
Winds creen wipe r blade s
Wax such as the w ax used in c ar washes can cause smearing on the w indscreen when the windsc reen wiper is switched on. Sm earing w ip er b la des ca n be clea ned w ith a soft cloth and Vaux hall Windscreen Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessa ry see page 206.
Locks
The lock s a re lubricated at the fa ctory using a high quality lock c ylinder grease. Use d e-icing agent only where absolutely necessary, as this removes g rease a nd impairs lock function. After using de-icing agent, have the locks regreased by a workshop.
Engine compartment
Areas of the engine compartment that are painted in the same colour as the vehic le must be looked after lik e any other p ainted surface. It is adv isable to wash the engine compartment before and after winter and preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and brake fluid reserv oir with plastic sheets before washing the eng ine.
Underbody
Your vehicle has a factory-app lied PVC undercoating in the wheel arches (including the longitudinal mem bers) which prov ides permanent protec tion and needs no special maintenance. The surfaces of the vehicle underbody not covered by PVC are provided with a durable p rotective wax coating in critic al areas.
198
Service, Maintenance
In our ex perience, the most com mon cause of all complaints is the result of misunderstanding or lack of communication betw een the customer a nd the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. We sincerely hope y ou will never have cause to complain ab out y our vehicle. However, if things do go wrong, the best course of action for y ou to ta ke is to contact your Vaux hall Authorised Repairers Serv ice Reception S taff and exp la in the difficulty you are having. We are confident they will d o their utmost to resolv e the problem to your complete satisfaction. Sometim es, howev er, despite the best of intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If y our prob lem has not been resolved to y our satisfaction, please make an appointment to discuss the matter with the M ana ger of the department c oncerned. The majority of areas of concern can be quic kly resolved in this way. Should you wish to pursue the matter further, the Principal of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer should be made aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in cases such as this to write to him to confirm your problem and the solutions that have been offered. You can be assured the Authorised Repairers Principal w ill only be too anxious to fully inv estigate y our prob lems and correct any errors mad e. After all, he has a large investment in his business a nd is proud of his reputation and professionalism and fully realises that satisfied customers are his key to success. In the unlikely event that you are still not happy with the answer your Vaux hall Authorised Repa irer has given, or the action he proposes to c orrect the problem , y ou m ay contact the Custom er C are Department 1 ) where a team of C ustomer C are C onsultants will spare no effort to ensure y our complete satisfaction. Vauxhall Motor s Ltd. C ustomer Care, Griffin House, O sborne Road, LUTON , Beds. , LU1 3Y T Telephone: 0845 090 2044 They w ill review all the facts involved. Then if it is felt some further action can be tak en, the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e adv ised accordingly. In any case, y our contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing Vauxhall Motors position in the m atter. If y ou are not satisfied with the outcome, y ou ca n if you wish, seek advice from an independent third p arty suc h as: Autom obile Association (A. A. ) Fanum House, BASI NGSTO KE, Hants., R G21 2EA
1)
Inspection system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . A note on safety .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Checking and topping up fluids ... ..... . Engine oil . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Diesel fuel filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Coolant .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Brake fluid ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Wind screen and headlight wash sy stems 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Battery ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Protection for electronic c om ponents Vehicle decomm issioning. ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle recommissioning.. ..... .... .... ..... .
200 201 201 202 202 203 204 205 206 207 207 208 209 209
Ca lls may b e mon itored a nd record ed for training purpo ses.
Servic e, Mainten ance

Royal Autom obile Club (R.A.C. ), R.A.C . Motoring Services Ltd., 89-91 Pall Mall, LON DO N, SW1Y S 45 The C ustomer Rela tions Depa rtm ent, Soci ety of Motor Manufacturers and Traders Ltd. (S .M.M. T. ), Forbes House, Ha lk in Street, LON DO N, SW1X 7DS Customer C omplaints Serv ice, Scot tish Motor Trad e A ssocia tion, (S.M .T.A.), 3 Palmerston Place, EDI NBURGH, EH12 5AQ The N ationa l Conciliation Service, Retail Motor Ind ust ry Fed era tion, 9 North Street, RUGBY , CV21 2AB If you have a p roblem w hilst abroa d: The S ervice Departments of ADAM O PEL GmbH and General Motors branches everyw here will provide information and assistance: In Luxemb ourg please contact the General M otors Service Department in Antwerp Belg ium Telephone 00 32-34 50 63 29 General Motors Austria GmbH Gro-Enzersdorfer S tr. 59 1220 Vi enna Austria Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or 00 43-1-2 88 77 0 General Motors Belgium N.V. Noorderlaan 401 Haven 500 2030 Antw erp Belgium Telep hone 00 32-34 50 63 29 General Motors Southeast Europe, org. slo ka Olbrachtova 9 140 00 Prague C zech Republ ic Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321 General Motors Denm ark Jaegersborg Alle 4 2920 C harlottenlund Denm ark Telep hone 00 45-39 97 85 00 Vauxhall M otors Ltd . Customer Ca re Griffin House, O sborne Road Luton, Bedfor dshi re, LU1 3YT Engla nd Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044 General Motors Finland Oy Pa juniityntie 5 00320 Helsinki Finl and Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47 General Motors Franc e 1 9, avenue du M arais Angle Q ua i de Bezons 95101 Argenteuil C edex France Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51 ADAM OPEL Gm bH Bahnhofsp la tz 1 65423 Rsselsheim Germ any Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or 00 49-61 42-7 70 General Motors Hellas S. A. 56 Kifisia s Av enue & Delfon str. Amarousion 151 25 Athens Greece Tel 00 30-1-6 80 65 01 General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd. S zabadsag utca 117 2040 Budars H ung ary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
199
General Motors India S ix th Floor, Tower A, Global Business Park Mehra uli Gurgaon Road Gurga on 122 022, Har yana India Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333 General Motors Ireland Ltd. O pel House, Unit 60, Heather Road Sa ndyford , Dublin 18 Ireland Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00 General Motors Italia Srl Piazza le dellIndustria 40 00144 Rome It aly Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51 General Motors Ned erland B. V. Lage Mosten 49 63 4822 NK Breda N et herla nds Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00 General Motors Norge AS K jeller-Vest 6 2027 Kj el ler Norw ay Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o. Domaniewsk a 41 06- 672 Wa rsa w Pola nd Tel. 00 48- 22-606 17 00
200
General Motors Portugal Q uinta d a Fonte Ed ifico Ferno M agalhes, Piso 2 2780-190 Pa o dArc os Portugal Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00 General Motors S outheast Europe, org. z lok a Apollo Business Centre Mlynsk Nivy 45 821 09 Bra tislav a S lovak ia Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543 General Motors Espaa S. L. Paseo de la C astellana, 91 28046 M adrid Spa in Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 General Motors N orden AB rsta ngv gen 17 100 73 S tockhol m S weden Tel. 00 46-20 333 000 General Motors S uisse S .A. Stelzenstrae 4 8152 Glatt brugg Swit zerland Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 General Motors Trkiy e Ltd. S ti. Kemalpa sa y olu z eri 35861 Torb ali/Izmir Tur key Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 In Alb ania, Bosnia-H erzegovina , Bulga ria, C roatia, Estonia, La tvia , Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania , Serbia -Monteneg ro and Sl ov enia please contact the General Motors S ervice Department in Budars Hungary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
Inspection system
For vehicles with flexib le engine oil change and serv ice intervals, the length of these interva ls is based on several parameters stemm ing from usage. For this reason, va rious engine-specific data is continually gathered a nd is used to calculate the remaining distance until the nex t Service. This remaining distance can be displa yed with the ignition off: briefly press the trip odometer reset button, the m ileage / kilometre reading app ears. Press the button again for around 2 seconds, InSP and the rem aining d istance is shown. If the rema ining d istance is less than 1000 miles (1500 km ), InSP is displayed with a remaining distance of 600 miles (1000 km) when the ignition is sw itched on and off. I nSP is disp layed for severa l seconds if the remaining distance is less than 600 m iles (1000 k m). Have the Service work that is due carried out within one week or 300 miles (500 k m). Have this work carried out by a Va ux hall Authorised Repairer in order to avoid inva lid ation of warranty claims. Further information on maintenance and the Service Plan c an be found in the Serv ice Booklet, which is in the glove com partment.
In order to ensure economical and safe vehicle operation and to m ainta in the value of y our v ehicle, it is of vital importanc e that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals as specified. In the case of vehicles with fixed engine oil cha ng e and service intervals, InSP appears in the odometer display if the ignition is switched on when serv ic ing is ov erdue: ha ve the nex t Serv ice c arried out by a work shop within one w eek or 300 miles (500 km). The service interval display takes account of off-the-road p eriods during which the battery is d isconnected.

Hav e m aintenanc e work and repa ir work on the vehicle body and engine carried out by a repairer in accordance with Vauxhall Motors recommendations, using Genuine Vauxhall Parts a nd Accessories. We recommend consulting your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who has ex cellent knowled ge of Vauxhall vehicles and possesses the necessary special tools and the c urrent Serv ic e Instruc tions from Vauxhall. To avoid a loss of warranty claims, y ou are a dvised to consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the warranty p eriod in particular. For further inform ation, see the Service Book let.
201
Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories
A note on safety
We rec om mend that you use "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" a nd conv ersion p arts ap prov ed exp ressly for your vehicle type. These parts ha ve undergone spec ia l tests to establish their reliability, safety a nd specific suitability for Vauxhall v ehicles. Despite continuous market monitoring, we ca nnot assess or guarantee these attributes for other prod uc ts, even if they hav e b een granted approval by the releva nt authorities or in some other form. "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and conversion parts approved by Vauxhall c an be ob tained from y our Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, w ho c an prov ide com prehensive advice about permitted tec hnical c hanges and ensure that the part is installed correc tly . To av oid injury from moving parts and cab les conduc ting ignition voltage, only carry out engine c om partment checks (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil level) when the ignition is switched off.
Separate anti-corrosion s ervice
Hav e this work done in accordance with the interv als specified in the Service Booklet.
9 Warn ing
The cooling fan is controlled by a thermosw itc h and can therefore start unexpectedly ev en if the ig nition is switched off. Risk of injury . Electronic ignition sy stems use a very high voltage. Do not touch the ig nition sy stem; danger to life.
202
Engine oil le vel and consumption
Every engine consum es engine oil for technical rea sons. The engine oil consumption cannot be assessed until a fa irly long dista nce has been driven, and may be above the spec ified v alue when the vehicle is first being driven (run-in period). Frequent driving at high revs increases engine oil c onsumption. The engine oil lev el is check ed autom atic ally1) see page 85. Before emba rk ing on a long journey it is advisable to check the engine oil lev el.
Engine oil level che ck, topping up engine oil
Never carry out any repairs or adjustm ent and m aintenance work on the vehic le yourself. This especia lly applies to the engine, chassis and safety pa rts. You may , out of ignorance, infringe the provisions of the la w and, b y not performing the work properly , you m ay endanger y ourself and other road users.
9 Warning
Imp ortant: It is the owner s responsibility to maintain the correct level of a n appropriate quality oil in the engine. The illustrations show checking of a petrol eng ine and a diesel engine.
Checking and topping up fluids
The cap s for topping up the engine oil, the coolant, the wa sh fluid and the oil d ipstick are yellow for ease of identifica tion.
Engine oil
Information on engine oils is available in the S ervice Booklet.
1)
N ot for Z 20 LEH engine. Sales d esigna tion s ee p a ge 212.

The oil level must be c hecked with the vehic le on a level surface and with the engine (which must b e at operating tem perature) switched off. Wait at lea st 5 minutes before check ing the level to allow the norma l engine oil accumulation in the engine to flow into the oil p an. We recommend that you use g enuine eng ine oil filters.
203
9 Warn ing
Emp ty engine oil conta iners are not domestic refuse. Observ e legal requirem ents regarding protection of your health and the environment w hen disposing of used oil a nd engine oil filters.
Diesel fuel filter

Top up with the same brand of engine oil that was used during the previous oil cha ng e, following the instruc tions in the Serv ic e Booklet. To close, position the cap and screw it into place. To check the engine oil level, insert wiped oil dipstick into dipstick tube as far as it will go. Top engine oil up if the lev el has dropped into the range of the top -up m ark MIN . The engine oil level must not exceed the upper mark M AX on the dipstick. Excess engine oil must be drained off or extracted. If the engine oil level is above the MAX mark, there is a risk of damag e to the engine or the ca ta lytic converter. Ca pacity between MI N and MA X marks see pages 224, 225. Capacities see pages 224, 225.
When changing the engine oil, have the diesel fuel filter checked by a workshop for any residual water. Illumination of control indicator A indicates w ater in the diesel fuel filter 3. Hav e d iesel fuel filter check ed a t shorter interva ls if the vehicle is subjected to extrem e opera ting conditions such a s high humidity (prima rily in coasta l areas), extrem ely hig h or low outside temperatures and substantially varying daytime and night-time temperatures.
9 Warning
Do not allow the eng ine oil to drop below the minim um lev el!
Engine oil change , engine oil filter change
Have engine oil and filter changed by a work shop in ac corda nce with the service intervals ind icated.
204
The frost protection m ust ensure antifreeze protection down to approx. -28 C . Too low a concentration of anti-freeze will reduce frost protection and corrosion protection. If required, top up anti-freeze. If coolant loss is top ped up with water, ha ve c oncentra tion checked and add anti-freeze if necessary. The coolant should be a little a bove the KALT / C OLD mark in the expansion tank with a cold cooling sy stem. The coolant level c an also be rea d off from the outside of the exp ansion tank.
Coolant
The g ly col-based c oolant provides excellent corrosion protection for the heating a nd cooling systems as well as anti-freez e protection d ow n to approx. -28 C. It rem ains in the cooling system throughout the y ear and need not be changed . Use of certain anti-freezes can lea d to engine damage. We therefore recommend that you use only approved anti-freezes.
9 Warn ing
Allow engine to cool down before removing c oolant filler cap. Remove filler cap carefully so that pressure can escape slowly, otherwise there is a risk of sca ld ing. When the engine is at op erating temperature, coolant lev el rises. It falls aga in when the system cools. If it falls below the KALT / COLD mark when the system is cold, top up to the mark. Top up a nti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is av ailable, top up with clean tap water. If tap water is unavailab le, distilled water can b e used.
Coolant level
9 Warning
Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it must therefore be k ept in the original container and out of the rea ch of children.
Anti-freeze and corrosion prote ction
Hardly a ny losses occur since the cooling sy stem is sealed and it is thus rarely necessary to top up the coolant.
When you top up with tap water or distilled water, add concentrated anti-freeze and possibly mix in a nti-freeze as well. Have the reason for the loss of coolant rectified by a workshop. Too low a coolant level can cause engine dam age. To close, position the cap and screw it into place.
Hav e y our coolant replaced at the correct concentration by a workshop at the start of the w inter.

Coolant te mperature
Control indicator W illuminates when coolant temp erature is too high. C heck coolant lev el imm ediately: z Coolant level too low: Top up coolant: see the instructions under "Anti-freeze and corrosion protection" and "C oolant level". H ave the reason for the loss of c oolant rectified b y a work shop. z Coolant level correct: Have the reason for the high c oolant temperature rectified. S eek the assistance of a workshop.
205
Brake fluid
Brake fluid lev el
9 Warning
Brake fluid is poisonous a nd corrosive. Do not allow it to contact eyes, sk in, fabrics or painted surfaces. Direct conta ct may cause injuries and dam age.
There are brake fluids which could lead to dam age or reduced braking w hen used. Therefore, we recommend that you use, where necessary , only ap prov ed high performa nc e brak e fluid. When topping up, ensure max imum cleanliness as contamination of the brak e fluid can lead to function prob lems in the brak ing sy stem. O nce the brake fluid level has been correc ted, hav e the reason for the loss of brak e fluid rectified by a workshop.
Brake fluid change
Brake fluid is hygrosc op ic , i.e. it ab sorbs water. If the brakes become hot, such as when driving on long downhill stretches, va pour b ub bles can occur in the water, which can hav e an extremely adverse effect on braking power (dep ending on the proportion of water). The fluid c hange interva ls specified in the S ervice Booklet m ust therefore be observed. The fluid lev el in the container must be neither higher than the MAX mark nor low er than the M IN m ark.
9 Warn ing
Have your brake fluid changed at a workshop. Observ e legal requirements regarding p rotection of your health and the environm ent when disposing of used oil and engine oil filters.
206
Service se tting for front windscre en wiper
Windscreen wiper
Clear vision is essential for safe driving. Perform regular checks on the windscreen wiper and hea dlight wash system 3 to ensure they are operating correctly. We recom mend wiper bla de replacement at lea st once a y ear. If the windscreen is dirty, operate the windscreen wash system before sw itc hing on the windscreen wiper or setting the wiper to automa tic op eration with the rain sensor 3. This w ill a void wiper blade wear. Do not switc h on the windscreen wiper or set it to a utomatic operation with the rain sensor 3 if the w indscreen is ic ed up, a s this could dam age the wiper blades or the wiper sy stem. We recommend that you release a froz en windscreen wiper using de-ic er spray before sta rting the vehic le, to p revent wiper motor damag e. Sm earing w ip er b la des ca n be clea ned w ith a soft cloth and Vaux hall Windscreen Wash Solvent. Wiper b la des whose lips have become hardened, cracked or c ov ered with silicone must be replaced. This may be necessary as a result of the effects of ice, tha wing salt or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning agents. Switch off the wind screen wiper or automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in car w ashes see pages 11, 12, 195. Wind screen wiper care see pag e 197. To ensure proper op eration of the rain sensor 3, the sensor a rea must be free from dust, dirt and ice, which is why the wind screen wash system must be operated at regular interv als and the sensor area de-iced. Vehicles with a rain sensor 3 can be id entified by the sensor area near the top of the windscreen.
(e.g. for changing or cleaning the front wiper blades). Within 4 seconds of turning off the ig nition, with the key still in the starter switch or for the Open&S tart sy stem 3 after switching off the ignition and before opening the drivers door, press the wiper stalk d own. Release wiper stalk a s soon as the wiper is vertical.

Wiper blades on the windscreen
Lift wiper arm. Diseng age wiper b la de a s shown in Fig . 17318 T and rem ove.
207
Windscreen and headlight wash systems 3
The wind screen wash system and hea dlight wash system will not freeze in winter: Frost protection down to Mix ture strength Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent: Water 1: 3 1: 2 1: 1 2: 1
- 5 C - 10 C - 20 C - 30 C
Activating service position, see previous column. Lift wiper arm, push both bars on wiper arm, relea se wiper blade and rem ov e.
When closing the container, press the lid firmly ov er the bea ded edge all the way round.
Battery
The fluid reservoir filler neck for the wind screen wash system and headlight wash system 3 is located at the front next to the left headlight. Capacities see pages 224, 225. Fill only with clean water to prev ent the nozz les from clogging. To im prov e cleaning efficienc y, w e recommend tha t you ad d a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent.
Wiper blade on the rear window
The battery is m aintenance-free.
208
9 Warning
Have your battery changed at a work shop. O bserve legal req uirements regarding protection of y our health and the environment when disposing of old batteries. The b attery m ay b e plac ed under additional load or d ischarged by retro-fitting electric or electronic accessories. S eek adv ice on technical options, e.g. having a stronger ba ttery fitted. Laying up the vehicle for more than 4 weeks can lead to ba ttery d ischarge, which may reduce the service life of the battery. Disconnect battery from on-board power supply by detaching negative term inal. The Vaux hall alarm sy stem 3 siren m ust b e deactivated as follows: switch the ignition on then off, disconnect the vehicles battery within 15 sec onds.
Ensure that ignition is switched off before connecting battery . Then perform the following actions: z Setting date and tim e in the inform ation display see pages 90, 93, 97. z Activate window 3 if necessary see page 48. In order to prevent the battery from discharging, some consumers such as the courtesy light autom atically switch off after approx . 10 minutes.
To av oid damaging the vehic le, d o not ma ke a ny modifications to the electrical system, e. g. connecting ad ditional consum ers or tampering with electronic control units (chip tuning).
9 Warn ing
Electronic ignition sy stems use a very high voltage. Do not touch the ig nition sy stem; danger to life.
Disconnecting / connecting the batte ry from / to the electrical system

Before c harging, disc onnec t the battery from the electrical system: rem ov e the negative cable first, then the positive.
The battery poles, i. e. the connections for the positive and neg ativ e ca bles, must not be c onfused. When connecting, connect the positiv e ca ble first, then the negative.
Protection for electronic components
In order to prevent faults in electronic components in the electrica l sy stem, nev er connect or disconnect battery with engine running or ignition switched on. Never start engine w ith b attery disconnected, e.g. when starting using jump leads.
209
Vehicle decommissioning
O bserve na tional regulations. If the vehicle is to be laid up for several months, the following work should b e undertaken by a workshop in ord er to prevent dam age. z Wash and preserve the vehicle see pa ge 195. z Check preserv ation in engine com partment a nd on underbody a nd rectify where necessary . z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on bonnet and doors. z Change engine oil see page 203. z Check anti-freeze and c orrosion protection see page 204. z Check the coola nt level, top up with antifreeze if nec essary see pag e 204. z Empty windsc reen w ash system and headlight wash system. z Inc rease ty re pressure to value sp ecified for full load see page 220.
Vehicle storage
z Park v ehicle in a dry, well ventilated place. With manual transmission or Easy tronic 3 , enga ge 1st or rev erse gear. With automatic transm ission 3, selector lever in P. Use chocks or the lik e to prevent the vehicle from rolling . z Do not apply handbrake. z Disconnect battery by disengaging neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical system see page 207.
Vehicle recommissioning
O bserve national regulations. Perform the following work before recommissioning the vehicle: z Connect ba ttery see page 207. z Check tyre pressure and correc t if necessary see page 220. z Fill up w indscreen wash system a nd headlight wash system see page 207. z Check engine oil level see p age 202. z Check the coolant level; top up with anti-freeze if necessary see page 204. z Fit the num ber p la te if necessary .
210
Tec hnic al D ata
Technical Data
Vehicle documents, identification plate
Vehicle docum ents, identification plate..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle identification d ata.... .... .... ..... . Coolant, b ra ke fluid, oils .. ..... .... .... ..... . Engine data. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Performance.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuel consump tion, CO 2 emissions ..... . Weights, pay loa d and roof load .. ..... . Tyres ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca pacities ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Dimensions.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Insta lla tion dim ensions of trailer tow ing equipment. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Permissible options for fitting a child restra int . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
210 211 211 212 214 215 217 220 223 224 226 227 228
Information on identification plate: The tec hnical d ata is determined in accordance with European C ommunity standards. We reserve the right to make modifications. S pecifications in the vehic le docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those given in this manual. The identification plate is affix ed to the front right door frame. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Manufa cturer Type approval numb er Vehicle I dentification Number Permissib le Gross Vehicle Weight Permissib le Gross Train Weig ht Maxim um perm issible front axle load Maxim um perm issible rear ax le load Vehicle-specific or country-specific data
Technical Data
211
Vehicle identification data
Coolant, brake fluid, oils

Use approved fluids only. Use of unsuitable fluids could ca use serious dam age to the vehicle.
Engine oils
Information on engine oils is availab le in the Serv ice Booklet.
The Vehicle Identification Numb er is stamped on the identification plate a nd on the right side of the vehicle floor, under a cover between the front door and the seat.
The Vehicle I dentification N umber may b e embossed on the instrument pa nel. Engine code and engine number: stamp ed on left-ha nd side of engine on crankcase.
212
Tec hnic al D ata
Engine data
Sales designation Eng ine identifier code Numb er of cylinders Piston displacement (cm 3) Brake horse power (k W) at rpm Torque (Nm ) at rpm Fuel type 1) O ctane requirement unleaded or unleaded or unleaded (RO N) 2 ) 1.6 Z 16 XEP 4 1598 77 6000 150 3900 Petrol 95 98 91
3) 3) 3)4 )
1.6 Z 16 XE1 4 1598 77 6000 150 3900 Petrol 95 98 91

3) 3) 3 )4)
1.8 Z 18 XER 4 1796 103 6300 175 3800 Petrol 95 98 91

3) 3) 3)4 )
2.0 Turbo Z 20 LER 4 1998 147 5400 262 4200 Petrol 95 3) 98 3 ) 91 3 )4) 6400 0.6
2.0 Turbo Z 20 LEH 4 1998 177 5600 320 2400-5000 Petrol 95 3 )5) 98 3 ) 91 3 )6 ) 6400 0.6
2.2 Z 22 YH 4 2198 110 5600 215 4000 Petrol 95 3) 98 3) 7) 6500 0.6
Max . permissible engine speed, continuous (rpm) ap prox . 6500 O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6
6500 0.6
6400 0.6
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , unlead ed DIN EN 2 28. Stan da rd high-q uality fuels . Va lue printed in bo ld : recom mend ed fuel. Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber). Use of 91 RON fuel reduces p ower an d torq ue. Use of 95 RON fuel reduces p ower an d torq ue. Slig ht in crease in fuel con sump tio n. If no u nlea d ed p remium fuel is ava ila ble, 91 RON ca n b e used, taking ca re to a vo id high en gine loa d or fu ll load a s well a s d rivin g in mo untainou s terra in with a caravan / trailer loa d o r hig h pa ylo ad . The use o f fuel w ith a n octane of 91 R ON is not permitted .
Technical Data
213
Engine data
Sales designation Eng ine identifier code Numb er of cylinders Piston displacement (cm 3) Brake horse power (k W) at rpm Torque (Nm ) at rpm Fuel type 1) Cetane requirement (CN) 2 ) 1.9 CDTI Z 19 DT 4 1910 88 3500 280 2000-2750 Diesel 49 (D) 3 ) 5200 0.6 1. 9 CDTI Z 19 DTH 4 1910 110 4000 320 2000-2750 Diesel 49 (D) 3) 5200 0. 6
Max . permissible engine speed, continuous (rpm) ap prox . O il consumption (l/1000 km)
1) 2) 3)
Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , diesel DIN EN 590 Stan da rd high-q uality fuels : D = D ies el A lo wer va lue is pos sib le with w inter diesel fu els.
214
Tec hnic al D ata
Performance
Eng ine 1 )
(approx. mph/k m/h) Z 16 XEP 110/177 Z 16 XE1 110/177 Z 18 XER 122/197 122/197 Z 20 LER 140/225 Z 20 LEH 144/231 Z 19 DT 116/186 113/182 Z 22 YH 124/200 118/190 Z 19 DTH 126/202 123/198
Max imum speed2) Manual tra nsmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Eng ine 1 ) Max imum speed2) Manual tra nsmission Easytronic Automatic transmission
1) 2)
Sa les desig nation see pa ges 212, 213. The ma xim um s peed ind ica ted is achieva ble a t kerb weig ht (with out driver) p lu s 200 kg p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent cou ld red uce th e s pecified maximu m sp eed of th e vehicle.
Technical Data
215
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged by 1999/100/EC) has applied for the measurement of fuel consumption since 1996. The d irective is oriented to a ctual driving practices: Urban driving is ra ted at ap prox . 1 / and extra-urb an driving with approx. 3 2 / (urba n and ex tra -urba n consumption). 3 Cold starts and acc eleration phases are also taken into consideration. The specific ation of C O2 emission is a lso a constituent of the directive.
The figures given must not be taken as a guarantee for the actual fuel consum ption of a particular vehic le. All va lues are based on the EU ba se model with standard equipment. The calculation of fuel consump tion as specified b y directive 1999/100/EC tak es account of the vehicles kerbweight, ascertained in a ccord ance w ith these regulations. Optional ex tras may result in slightly higher fuel consumption and C O 2 emission levels than those quoted.
To convert l/100 k m into mpg, divide 282 by num ber of litres/100 km. S aving fuel, p rotecting the environm ent see page 143.
216
Tec hnic al D ata
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 k m), CO 2 emission (approx. g/k m) (up to tyre width 195 mm )
Eng ine 1 ) Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/Automatic transm ission Urb an Extra-urban Total CO 2 Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/Automatic transm ission Urb an Extra-urban Total CO 2 Z 16 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 18 XER Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Z 22 YH
9. 3// 5. 8// 7. 1// 170//
9. 3// 5. 8// 7. 1// 170//
10.1/ 9.9/ 6.2/ 6. 0/ 7.6/ 7. 4/ 182/ 178/
// // // //
// // // // Z 19 DT
// // // // Z 19 DTH
// // // //
// // // //
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 k m), CO 2 emission (approx. g/k m) (up to tyre width 225 mm )
Eng ine 1 ) Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/Automatic transm ission Urb an Extra-urban Total CO 2 Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/Automatic transm ission Urb an Extra-urban Total CO 2
1)
Z 16 XEP
Z 16 XE1
Z 18 XER
Z 20 LER
Z 20 LEH
Z 22 YH
9. 5// 6. 0// 7. 3// 175//
9. 5// 6. 0// 7. 3// 175//
10.3/10.1/ 13.3/ / 6.4/ 6.2/ 7.3/ / 7.8/ 7.6/ 9.5/ / 187/ 182/ 228//
13. 4// 7.4// 9.6// 230// Z 19 DT
11.3//11.6 6. 4// 6.7 8. 2// 8.5 197//204 Z 19 DTH
7.5/ /9.7 7.6// 9. 7 5.0/ /5.6 5.1// 5. 6 5.9/ /7.1 6.0// 7. 1 159/ /192 160//192
Sa les desig nation see pa ges 212, 213.
Technical Data
217
Weights, payload and roof load

The p ayload is the difference between the p ermitted Gross Vehicle Weight (see identification plate, page 210) and the EC kerbweig ht.
To ca lc ulate the kerbweight, enter the data for your vehicle below: z Kerb weight from Ta ble 1, p age 218 z Ad ditional w eight of op tional extras from Ta ble 2, p age 219 z Weight of heavy accessories from Ta ble 3, p age 219 Total is the EC k erbweight. +... ..... .... .. kg
The combined total of front a nd rear ax le loa ds must not exceed the perm issible Gross Vehicle Weight. For exam ple, if the front ax le is bearing its m aximum permissib le load, the rear axle can only bear a load that is eq ua l to the Gross Vehicle Weight m inus the front axle load. When the carav an / trailer is coup led a nd the towing vehic le fully loaded (including all occupants), the perm issible rear ax le loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle docum ents) may be exceeded by 90 kg and the Gross Vehicle Weight rating by 75 kg. If the permissib le rear axle load is exc eeded, a max imum speed of 60 mph (100 k m/h). ap plies. If nationa l regulations specify a low er ma ximum speed for vehicles towing a caravan / trailer, this must b e observ ed. For perm itted axle load s, see identification plate a nd vehicle documents
Roof load
The permissible roof loa d is 75 kg. The roof load consists of the weight of the roof rac k plus the load carried. Driving hints see page 141. Roof racks, c aravan and trailer towing see page 164.
+... ..... .... .. kg
+... ..... .... .. kg =... ..... .... .. kg
O ptional equipment and accessories increase the kerbweight, w hich means that the p ayload will also change slig htly. Note the weights given in the vehicle documents.
218
Tec hnic al D ata
Table 1, Kerbweight in kg1 )

Model Zafira Eng ine 2 ) Z 16 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 18 XER Z 22 YH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Zafira with a ir Z 16 XEP condit ioning system or Elect roni c Z 16 XE1 Cl imate C ontrol Z 18 XER (EC C) Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Z 22 YH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual transmission 1505 1505 1503 1570 1613 1613 1520 1520 1518 1610 1665 1585 1628 1628 Ea sytronic 1503 1518 Automa tic transmi ssion 1595 1643 1643 1610 1658 1658
1) 2)
According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0 % fu ll). Sa les desig nation see pa ges 212, 213.
Technical Data
219
Table 2, Additional weight of optional extras in kg

Eng ine 1 ) Ex pression / Life Design SRi Club VXR Z 16 XEP 10 _ _ 12 Z 16 XE1 10 _ _ 12 Z 18 XER 102 ) 23 20 12 Z 20 LER _ 16 13 _ Z 20 LEH
3)
Eng ine 1 ) Ex pression / Life Design SRi Club VXR
Z 22 YH 5 2) 16 13 5
Z 19 DT 52 ) 16 13 5
Z 19 DTH _ 16 13 _
Table 3, Heavy accessories in kg

Accessories Weight Towi ng eq uipment 17 Adap tive Forward Lighting (AFL) 4 H ea dlight w ash syst em 3 Panoram ic roof 35
1) 2) 3)
Sa les desig nation see pa ges 212, 213. Life only. Va lues no t a va ila ble at tim e of p rinting.
220
Tec hnic al D ata

Winter tyres may only be used on the Za fira VXR on special alloy wheels approved by Vauxhall. Further inform ation see page 159.
Tyres
Restrictions
Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1)
Tyres of size 225/45 R 17 may only be used in conjunction with the Electronic S ta bility Programme (ES P) 3. Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market currently meet the structural requirem ents. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning suitab le tyre mak es. These ty res have und ergone special tests to establish their reliab ility , safety and specific suitability for Vaux hall vehicles. Despite continuous m arket monitoring, we are unable to assess these attributes for other tyres, ev en if they hav e been g ra nted approva l by the relevant authorities or in som e other form. Further information see pa ge 159.
Tyre chains 3
Ty re c hains may be used on the front wheels only. We rec om mend the use of fine ty re chains whic h rest by a max imum of 10 mm on the tyre tread and on the insides of the tyres with a chain lock. Ty re c hains are not permitted on tyres of size 225/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19. Further inform ation see page 159.
The specified ty re pressures are valid for cold ty res. The increased ty re pressure resulting from ex tensiv e d riv ing must not be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on the following pages ap ply to both summer and w inter tyres. Alway s inflate the spare wheel 3 to the tyre pressure for full load, see tables on following pages. Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure 3, see tables on next pag es. In v ehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem 3 there is a n adapter in the valv e cap key . S crew a dapter to valve before attaching tyre pressure gauge see page 160. Further information see pages 159 to 163.
Spare wheel 3
Wheels
Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm.
Winter tyres 3
Tyres of size 225/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19 are not permitted for use as winter ty res. If y ou use winter tyres, the spare wheel 3 may still be fitted with a summer tyre. I f you use the spare wheel the vehicles ha nd ling may be altered. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the vehic le.
Depend ing on the version, the spare w heel may ta ke the form of a temporary spare wheel 3: v ehicle driveab ility may be altered by use of the spare w heel. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the w heel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. Observ e the notes on this page and on pa ges 164, 176. On vehicles with alloy w heels 3: the spare wheel may hav e a steel rim . The spare wheel may be fitted with a sma ller tyre and smaller wheel tha n the wheels fitted to the vehicle.
1)
1 ba r corresp on ds to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si.
Technical Data
Continued:
221

Engine2 Z 16 XEP, Z 16 XE1, Z 18 XER Tyres 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 Z 22 Y H 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 All Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel) 3 )
Tyre pressure with load of up to 3 people Front 2.0/29 Rear 2.0/29
Tyre pressure EC O 1 ) loaded up to 3 people Front 2.5/36 Rea r 2.5/36
Tyre pressure with full load Front 2. 1/30 Rear 2. 6/38
2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.5/36 2.6/38 4.2/61
2.2/32 2.0/29 2.2/32 2.3/33 2.4/35 4.2/61
2.6/38
2.6/38
2. 3/33 2. 4/35 2. 5/36 2. 6/38 2. 8/41 4. 2/61
2. 8/41 2. 9/42 3. 0/44 3. 1/45 3. 2/46 4. 2/61
1)
1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si.
1) To achieve the sm allest a mou nt o f fuel con sump tio n po ssible. No t for u se with run -fla t tyres . 2) Sales d esigna tion s ee p a ges 212, 21 3. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel see p ag e 176.
222
Tec hnic al D ata

Tyre pressure with load of up to 3 people Engine2 ) Z 20 LEH Tyres 205/50 225/45 225/40 235/35 R R 173 )4) , R 18, R 19 173 ), Front 2.5/36 Rear 2.3/33 Tyre pressure EC O 1 ) loaded up to 3 peop le Front Rea r Tyre pressure with full load Front 2. 7/39 Rear 3. 2/46
Continued:
Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTH
195/60 R16 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18
2.6/38 2.4/35 2.5/36 2.5/36 4.2/61
2.4/35 2.2/32 2.3/33 2.3/33 4.2/61
2. 8/41 2. 6/38 2. 7/39 2. 6/38 4. 2/61
3. 2/46 3. 1/45 3. 1/45 3. 1/45 4. 2/61
Z 19 All
DTH5 )
205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel) 6 )
1)
1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
To achieve the sm allest a mou nt o f fuel con sump tio n po ssible. No t for u se with run -fla t tyres . Sales d esigna tion s ee p a ges 212, 21 3. Only permitted a s winter tyres. To g ua ra ntee a correct sp eed d is play, the electro nic sp eedom eter mus t b e rep ro gram med. Versio n with au tom atic tra nsm iss io n an d p ano ra mic roof. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel see p ag e 176.
Technical Data
223
Electrical system
Battery Voltage Amp hours 12 Volt 44 Ah / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3
Battery for remote c ontrol of central locking sy stem and electronic key of O pen&Start CR 20 32 sy stem
224
Tec hnic al D ata
Capacities
Eng ine 1 )
(approx. litres) Z 16 XEP 56 4.5 1.0 2.3 4.2 Z 16 XE1 56 4.5 1.0 2.3 4.2 Z 18 XER 56 4.5 1.0 2.3 4.2 Z 20 LER 56 4.25 1.0 2.3 4.2 Z 20 LEH 56 5. 0 1. 0 2. 3 4. 2 Z 22 YH 56 5. 0 1. 0 2. 3 4. 2
Fuel tank (nominal content) Engine oil with filter change between MI N and M AX on dipstick Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wa sh system with headlight wash system
1)
Technical Data
225
Capacities
Eng ine 1 )
(approx. litres) Z 19 DT 56 4. 3 0. 7 2. 3 4. 2 Z 19 DTH 56 4. 3 0. 7 2. 3 4. 2
Fuel tank (nominal content) Engine oil with filter change between MI N and M AX on dipstick Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wa sh system with headlight wash system
1)
226
Tec hnic al D ata
Dimensions
(approx. mm) Zafi ra O verall length O verall w id th Width with two ex terior mirrors O verall height Height with panora mic roof Lug gage compartment length at floor Lug gage compartment width Height of luggage compartment opening Wheelb ase Turning c ircle diam eter, wall to wall1 ) 4467 1801 2025 1635 1670 1088 1071 895 2703 11.50 Zafira VXR 4503 1801 2025 1635 1670 1088 1071 895 2703 11.85
1)
In metres.
Technical Data
227
Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment

All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted towing equipm ent.
9 Warning
Only use towing eq uipm ent approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retrofitting of towing equipment to a work shop.
Dimension A B C D E F G H I K
mm
76.4 425.4 448.7 404.0 510.5 466.0 188.5 168.0 466.0 510.5
228
Tec hnic al D ata
Permissible options for fitting a child restraint1)

Weight and age cl ass2 ) Group 0: up to 10 kg or approx. 10 months Group 0+: up to 13 kg or approx. 2 years Group I : 9 to18 k g or approx. 8 months to 4 y ears Group I I: 15 t o 25 kg or approx. 3 to 7 years Group I II: 22 t o 36 kg or approx. 6 to 12 y ears B2 , + O n front passeng er s seat On outboa rd sea ts in t he second row O n centre sea t in the sec ond row O n the seat s i n the t hi rd row
B1 , +
U, +
U, +, ++
UF
UF
1) 2)
For reas ons o f sa fety, w e recom mend tha t the child restraint be installed o n one o f the outbo ard sea ts in the secon d row o f sea ts. We reco mmen d the use of each system u ntil the child reaches the up per weight lim it.
Technical Data
B 1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vaux hall child restra int system with transponders. If the child restraint sy stem is being secured using a three-point seat belt, move seat height adjustment 3 to uppermost position. Move front passeng ers seat as far bac k as possible and move front pa ssengers seat belt anchorage point to lowest position. B 2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vaux hall child restra int system with transponders. If the child restraint sy stem is being secured using a three-point seat belt, move seat height adjustment 3 to uppermost position. Move front passeng ers seat as far back as possible so that vehicle safety b elt runs from anchorage point towards the front. U = Univ ersal suitability in conjunction with three-point seat belt. + = Vehicle seat av ailable with ISO -FIX attachments. When attaching using ISO -FIX, only the IS O-FIX child restraint systems permitted for the v ehicle m ay b e used.
229
++ = Vehicle seat av ailable with ISO -FIX attachments. When attaching using ISO -FIX a nd Top Tether, universally permitted ISO -FIX child restraint systems may be used. X = N o c hild restraint system permitted in this weight cla ss.
UF = Can be used universally for child restra int systems facing the front in combination with a three-p oint seat belt.
230
In dex
Index
A
AB S (Anti-lock Brake System ).. ..... .... ..... 159 Ac cessories. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 174 Ac cessory socket ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 78 Ad just incline Seat . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 50 AFL (Adaptive Forward Lighting) .... ..... 108 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 191 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Air conditioning system ... .... .... ..... . 114, 119 Air intak e.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 130 Air qua lity sensor ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 125 Air recirculation system .... .... ..120, 123, 129 Air vents . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 115 Airba g system . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .23, 69 Airba gs... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 69 Ala rm .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 44 Ala rm system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 42 Alterna tor ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 84 Antenna . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 112, 195 Anti-freeze . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 204 Anti-freeze protection. ..... .... .... ..... . 204, 207 Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel .... .... ..... .... ..... 144 O ctane number.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 212 Anti-theft alarm sy stem ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 42 Anti-theft locking system . .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 38 Towing equip ment .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 166 Anti-theft protection ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 18 Aq ua planing ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 162 Arm rest... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 52 Ashtray ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 79, 110
Automatic air recircula tion m od e. 126, 128 Automatic anti-dazz le interior mirror.. ... 46 Automatic level control... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 153 Automatic transm ission.. .... ..... .. 14, 15, 136 Automatic mode .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 137 Control indica tor. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138 Driv ing programme ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138 Fault .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 140 Interruption of p ow er supply ... ..... .... . 141 Kickd ow n.... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 139 Manual mode . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138 Selector lev er... .... .... ..... ... 14, 15, 137, 138 Winter programme. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 139 Automatic wiping ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 12, 103
Index
231
B
Battery ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 142, 207, 223 Interrup tion of power supply .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 48, 135, 141 Battery discharge p rotection.... .... ..... .... 110 Before sta rting-off ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 16 Belt force limiters . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..64 Belt tensioners. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 64 Bleeding, d iesel fuel system.. .... .... ..... .... 170 Board Information Disp la y ... .... .... ..... .... .. 89 Bonnet ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 170 Brake assist . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 157 Brake light ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 157 Brake system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 84 Brakes ABS .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 159 Bra ke assist . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 157 Bra ke fluid ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 205 Bra ke lig hts.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 191 Bra ke servo unit ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 141 Footbrake .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 157 Handbrake .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 158 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 187 Bulbs ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 187
C
Capacities .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 224 Car Pass . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 30 Carava n / trailer towing ... .... .... ..... . 141, 167 Care .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 194 Catalytic conv erter .. .... ..... .... ..146, 148, 171 Central lock ing sy stem ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 37 Changing the b attery Remote c ontrol .... .... ..... .... .... .. 33, 37, 223 Changing tyre / wheel type . .... ..... .... ..... 159 Changing wheels ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 176 Chassis num ber, see vehicle identification num ber .. ..... 211 Check control .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 25, 101 Child restraint sy stems ..... .... .... ..... ... 68, 228 Child safety lock s..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 45, 47 Cigarette lighter . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 78, 110 Climate control ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 114 Clutch operation. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142 CO 2 emissions . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 215 Cold start ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142 Colour Information Display . .... ..... .... ..... .. 89 Continuous Damping C ontrol.. ..... ... 85, 150 Contra st.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 98
C ontrol indicators... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 8, 82, 83 ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sy stem).. ..... .... . 159 AFL (Adaptive Forwa rd Lighting)87, 108 Airb ag .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 73 Belt tensioners .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 64 Brake sy stem... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 158 Cruise control .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 151 DDS (Deflation Detection System ) ... . 154 Engine elec tronics... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 147 ESP (Electronic Stab ility Prog ra m).... . 148 Exhaust... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 147 IDS+ (Interactive Driving Sy stem) .... .. 150, 151 Immobiliser. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 31 Parking dista nce sensors ..... .... ..... .... . 153 Tra nsmission ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138 Tyre pressure monitoring system . .... . 156 C oolant . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204 C oolant level .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204 C oolant tempera ture . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 84 C ooled glove compartm ent .... .... ..... .... . 117 C ooling .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 120, 124 C orrecting time... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 92, 97 C orrosion protection .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 196, 201 C oupling socket load . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 167 C ourtesy lights .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 109 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 193 C ruise control. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 151 C urtain airbag s .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 72 C urv e lighting (AFL) ... ..... .... ..... .... .... 29, 108
232
In dex
D
Data .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 30, 210 Date .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 90, 93 Daytime running lig hts . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 105 DDS (Deflation Detection Sy stem) .. 28, 154 Dec om missioning .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 208 Dem isting and defrosting ..... .... .... ..... .... 119 With air conditioning sy stem .... .120, 124 With Electronic Climate C ontrol ..... .... 127 Diesel fuel filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 203 Diesel fuel system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .170, 203 Diesel particle filter.. ..... .... ..... ... 86, 116, 142 Dimensions.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .225, 226 Dipped beam .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 10 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 188 Display ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 88, 89 Display instruments. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 87 Display mode .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 98 Door handle lighting .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 110 Door locks.... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 30, 196 Doors .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 84 Door-to-door lighting. .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 108 Drink holders ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 81 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .144, 199 Driving hints .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 141
E
Easytronic ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 14, 131 Driving programm es .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 133 Fault.... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 135 Interruption of power supply .... .... ..... 135 K ic kdown ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 134, 135 Selector lever... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 14 Starting-off.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 132 Winter programm e.. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 133 Economical driving .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 143 Elec tric windows . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 46 Elec trica l sy stem . ..... .... ..... .... ..182, 208, 223 Elec tro-hydraulic power-assisted steering . .... .... ..... .... ..... 141 Elec tronic C limate Control ... .... ..... . 115, 124 Elec tronic com ponents ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 208 Elec tronic imm obiliser . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 30 Elec tronic S tability Program .... ..... .... ..... 148 Engine c od e .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..211, 212, 213 Engine c ontrol indicator... .... .... ..... .... ..... 147 Engine oil .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 202 Engine oil c hange .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 203 Engine oil level and consump tion ... 85, 202 Engine speed .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142 Engine w ash .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196 Entry lighting... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110 Environmental protection .... .... ..... . 194, 203 ESP (Electronic Stab ility Prog ra m).... ..... 148 Exhaust control indicator . .... .... ..... .... ..... 147 Exhaust gases . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 148 Exhaust sy stem ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 148 Exterior mirrors ... ..... .... ..... .... .... .... 5, 45, 116
F
Fan .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 117, 201 Filling station Capac ities .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 224, 225 Engine oil level .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 202 Fuel .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 144, 212, 213 Opening the bonnet .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 170 Tyre pressure .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 144, 220 Vehic le da ta .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 211 Windscreen wash sy stem ..... .... ..... .... . 207 First-aid kit (cushion) . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 174 Flat tyre. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 179 Flex Organizer ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 60 Fog tail light... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 107 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Footb ra ke .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157 Front fog lig hts ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 106 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Front p assengers airbag ... ..... .... ..... .... ... 69 Fuel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 145, 212, 213 Fuel consum ption ... .... ..... .... ... 143, 144, 215 Fuel filler c ap . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 145 Fuel filter .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 203 Fuel level .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 88 Fuel system, diesel . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 170 Fuse ex tractor..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 183 Fuses . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 182
Index
233
G
Gears .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 14 Generator see Alternator ... .... .... ..... .... .. 84 Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Ac cessories . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 201 Glasses compartment .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 80 Glove compartment ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 80, 117 Glove compartment lighting . .... .... ..... .... 110 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 194 Graphical Information Displa y . .... ..... .... ..89 Gross Vehicle Weight.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 217
H
Halogen headlight sy stem .. .... ..... .... ..... 188 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 188 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Handbrake. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 17, 18, 158 Hazard w arning lights ..... .... .... ..... ... 11, 107 Head restraints ... ..... .... ..... .... .... .... 24, 51, 52 Head lig ht flash ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 10, 105 Head lig ht range adjustment ... ..... . 107, 187 Head lig ht switch. ..... .... ..... .... .... 10, 105, 106 Head lig ht w ash system .... .... .... 12, 103, 207 Head lig hts.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 10 Day tim e running lights . .... .... ..... .... ..... 105 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Reversing lights.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 107 Warning dev ice.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 102 Heated exterior mirrors.... .... .... ..... ... 13, 116 Heated rear window ... ..... .... .... ..... ... 13, 116 Heated seats... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116 Heating .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 114, 118 Seats ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116 With air conditioning system .... . 120, 124 With Electronic C limate Control .... ..... 126 Height ad justment Seat belts..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 66 Steering wheel. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 9 High-pressure jet ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 167, 197 Hill Start Assist .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 158 Horn.... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 11
I
Identifica tion plate. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 210 IDS + (Interactive Driving S ystem) .. 148, 150 Ignition logic .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 93, 98 Ignition system ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 201, 208 Im mobiliser .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 30 Information disp lay .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 89 Infotainment system .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 112, 113 Inspection system ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 88, 200 Instrum ent illumination ... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 109 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 194 Instrum ents .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 82 Interior m irror. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 5, 46 Interruption of power supply ... 48, 100, 102 Easytronic... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 135 Electric windows . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 48 Selector lev er lock ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 141 IS O-FIX .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 68
234
In dex
J
Jac k . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .174, 177 Jump leads .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 171
L
Language selection . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .93, 97 Lashing ey es ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 60 Leather trim .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196 Light switch ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 10 Lighting .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 10, 85, 105 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Load compartment see Luggag e com partment ... ..... .... ..... .. 41 Loading .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 167, 217 Locking d oors . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 2, 37 Locking from the inside ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 39 Locks... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196 Lubricants .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 202, 211 Luggag e comp artm ent Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 194 FlexO rganizer . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 60 Lashing eyes ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 60 Lighting .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110 Loading .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 62, 167, 217 Locking ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 41 Luggag e comp artm ent cover . ..... .... . 57, 58 Luggag e comp artm ent extension ... ..... .. 54 Lumba r support.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 50
M
Main b eam . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 10, 105 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 189 Control indica tor. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 86 Maintenance Air cond itioning system .. ..... .... ..... .... . 130 Anti-freeze protection . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204 Brake fluid .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 205 Brakes ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157 Cataly tic conv erter . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 148 Engine oil .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 202 Fuel consumption ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 144 Tyre pressure .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 160 Tyres .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 161, 162 Windscreen wiper ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 206 Manual transmission see Transm ission 14 Mirrors ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 5, 45, 46 Misted wind ow s.. .... .... ..... .... ..... 13, 119, 127 Mobile telephone ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113 Motorway lighting (AFL) . .... ..... .... .... 29, 108
K
Keys .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 30 Extending .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 30 Locking d oors... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 37 Remove .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 18 Starter switch ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 9 Starting the engine ... .... ..... .... .... . 9, 16, 17
Index
235
N
Neutra l, transm ission ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 14 Numb er plate lighting .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 193 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 193 Numb er plates ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 209
P
Pa intwork damage.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196 Pa noramic roof ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 48, 195 Pa rk ing distance sensors . .... .... ..... ... 27, 152 Pa rk ing ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 18, 152 Pa rk ing lights .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 10, 109 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 189 Pa rts ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 201 Pedals . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142 Perform ance ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 215 Petrol .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..144, 212, 213 Pinking .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 144 Pollen filter . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 129, 130 Power steering, see electro-hyd ra ulic power-assisted steering . .... .... ..... .... ..... 141 Preheating.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 17, 86 Puddle light ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110 Pushing, towing .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 171
R
Rad io . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 112 Rad io equipment (CB) .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113 Rad io reception .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 112 Rain sensor .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 12, 103, 206 Reading lights..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 110 Rear light cluster .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 105 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Rear seat b ackrests.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 20 Rear window w ash system ..... .... .... ..... .12, 104, 195, 207 Rear window wiper. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 104 Refuelling ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 145 Fuel filler cap .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 146 Remote control Central lock ing sy stem .... ..... 2, 26, 32, 34 Luggag e com partment .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..3 Steering wheel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 26, 112 Replacement keys .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 30 Reversing lights Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Roof load ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .63, 142, 144, 217 Roof racks .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 144, 164, 217 Run-flat tyres (RFT) .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 163 Running-in.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 141 Brakes ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157
O
O ctane numbers.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .144, 212 O dometer .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 87 O il chang e... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 203 O il level and consum ption .... .... .... ..... .... 202 O ils .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 202 O pen&Start system .. ..... .... ..... .17, 26, 33, 83 O perating temperature.... ..... .... .... ..... .... 142 O utside temperature ga uge . .... .... ..... .... ..90 O verrun.... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .142, 143
Q
Quickhea t... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..118, 123, 126
236
In dex
Serv ic e .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 198 Serv ic e interv al display .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 200 Serv ic e work .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 200 Side airbags .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 71 Silencer, see Ex ha ust system ... ..... .... ..... 148 Spare fuses. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 182 Spare keys.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 30 Spare wheel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 175, 176 Speed.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 143, 144 Fuel consum ption .... ..... .... .... ..... . 143, 144 Speedometer .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 87 Sport mode ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 27, 85, 150 Starter switch .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 9 Starting the engine.. .... ..... .... 9, 31, 131, 171 Self-help.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 171 Steam jet .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 167, 197 Steering colum n lock ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 9, 18 Steering wheel adjustm ent .. .... ..... .... ..... .... 9 Steering wheel rem ote control ..... ... 26, 112 Stop watch . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 94 Stowage compartments .. .... .... .... 79, 80, 81 Sunv isors .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 81, 110 Sunb lind . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 48 System setting s... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 92, 96
S
Safeguard against unauthorised use . 9, 19 Safety net .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 58 Sav ing energ y . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 143 Seat adjustment .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 3, 49 Seat belts. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .63, 65, 196 Seat height a djustment .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 4, 49 Seat occupancy recognition . .... .... ..... .... ..74 Seat position ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 50 Seats ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 3, 49, 50 Heated . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 116 Seats in second row. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 20 Seats in third row . .... ..... .... ..... .... ...20, 53, 55 Selector lever ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .132, 137 Selector lever lock .... ..... .... ..... .... .14, 15, 137 Self-diagnosis.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .64, 74, 159 Self-help... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 170 Automatic transmission .... .... .... ..... .... 140 Elec tric wind ow s... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 48 Information display .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 90 Remote control . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 32, 37
T
Tables.... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 79 Tachometer ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 87 Tail lights.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 105 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Tailgate. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 41 Technical data ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 210 Telephone see Mobile telephone.. .... . 113 Temperature regulation . .... ..... .... ..117, 126 Temporary spare wheel.. .... ... 164, 176, 220 The first 600 miles (1000 k m) .. .... ..... .... . 141 Tightening torque .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 178, 220 Time... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 90, 93 Tools.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 174 Top-Tether . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 69 Towing .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 172 Towing equipment . .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 164, 227 Towing eye .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 172, 173 Trailer / ca ra van towing . .... ..... .... ..141, 167 Transm ission displa y.. ..... .... ..... 88, 131, 136
Index
Transm ission, autom atic.. ..... .... .14, 15, 136 Automatic mode.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 137 Driv ing programme .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 138 Fault ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 140 Interrup tion of power sup ply .... ..... .... 141 Kickdown . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139 Selector lever .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 14, 137, 138 Selector lever lock ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 14 Winter prog ra mme ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139 Transm ission, Easytronic.. ..... .... .... ..... .... 131 Driv ing programmes. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 133 Fault ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 135 Interrup tion of power sup ply .... ..... .... 135 Kickdown . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .134, 135 Selector lever .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 14, 132 Winter prog ra mme ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 133 Transm ission, manual .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 14 Tread dep th .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 162 Trip computer . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 25, 93, 98 Trip odometer . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 87 Triple Information Display .... .... .... ..... .... .. 89 TSA (Trailer Stability Assist).. .... .... ..... .... 168 Turn signals. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 10, 106 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... .190, 191 Twin Audio .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 26, 112 Tyre chains.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .163, 220 Tyre condition . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 161 Tyre pressure... ..... .... ..... ... 28, 155, 160, 220 Tyre pressure monitoring system . ... 28, 155 Tyre repair kit.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 179 Tyres, wheels... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 159
237
U
Units of measure ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 93, 98 Unleaded fuel . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..144, 146, 212 Used oil... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 203
W
Warning buzzers .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 102 Warning messages. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 91, 95 Warning triang le, ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 174 Wash fluid reservoir, w indscreen wash system .. ..... .... ..... .... . 207 Weights . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 217 Wheels, tyres.. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 159 Windows Demisting and defrosting .... . 13, 119, 120, 124, 127 Windscreen w ash system .... ..... .... .... 12, 103 Anti-freeze protection . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 207 Capac ities .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 224, 225 Wa sh fluid reserv oir ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 207 Windscreen w ip er ... .... ..... .... ..... 11, 102, 205 Winter mode Starting-off a id ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 133 Winter operation Battery .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 142 Coolant, anti-freez e .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204 Fuel consumption ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 144 Fuel for diesel engines .... ..... .... ..... .... . 145 Heating .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 114, 120, 124 Locks . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 196 Tyre cha ins. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 164, 220 Window demisting and defrosting... . 119 Windscreen wash sy stem, anti-freeze protection . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 207 Winter programm e. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 133, 139 Winter tyres.... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 163, 220
V
Valve cap key . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .161, 220 Vehicle care .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 194 Vehicle decommissioning .... .... ..... .... ..... 208 Vehicle dimensions.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 226 Vehicle Identifica tion N um ber. ..... .... ..... 211 Vehicle keys see K ey s.... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 30 Vehicle recommissioning . .... .... ..... .... ..... 209 Ventilation.. ..... .... ..... .... .. 114, 118, 123, 127
238
In dex
X
Xenon headlight system Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 191 Driv ing abroad . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 111
Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England. Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest production information available at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice. Edition: January 2007.
ZAFIRA
TS 1639-B-07

Zafira Owners Manual - Jan07

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Zafira Owners Manual - Jan07

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ZAFIRA

Owners Manual Operation, Safety and Maintenance

Data specific to your vehicle Fuel

This symbol signifies:

Make use of the Owners Manual:

Your V auxhall Team

Commitment to customer satisfaction:

To adjust front seat: Pull handle, slide seat, release handle

Adjust front seat backrests: Turn handwheel

Adjusting front seat height 3: Operate levers on outboard side of seats

Adjusting interior mirror: Swivel mirror housing

Electrical exterior mirrors 3, adjust: Four-way switch in drivers door

Control indicators O pen&S tart system 3, 0

Hazard warning lights: On = Press Off = Press again

Activate horn: j Press in centre of steering wheel

6 Automatic transmission 3 page 136.

6 Automatic tra nsmission 3 pag e 136.

Before starting-off, check:

Preh ea ting system on ly sw itch es on a t low outsid e tem peratures.

Advice when parking:

Seats in second row 9 Warning

Adjust backres ts of outboard s eats

Seats in third row 9 Warning

Move se ats upright out of vehicle floor

Fold se ats into floor of vehicle

Side airbag system 3

Front airbag system

Curtain airbag sys te m 3

Active head restraints 3 on front seats

Operating menus in the information display 3

19,5 19:36 All values

257.0 40 7.0 31.0

miles mph gals mpg

Remote control on steering wheel 3

Open&Start system with electronic key and radio remote control 3

Parking distance sensors 3

Tyre pressure loss monitoring system (DDS = Deflation Detection System) 3

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3

Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3

Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows

Locks, Doors, Windows

Key with foldaway key section 3

Locks, D oors, Windo ws

Control indicator for immobiliser A

Store personal vehicle settings in the vehicle key 3

Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows

Radio frequency remote control 3 with mechanical key

Central locking system, mechanical anti-the ft locking system 3

Vauxhall alarm system 3 Electric windows 3

Locks, D oors, Windo ws

Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows

Radio frequency re mote control

Locks, D oors, Windo ws

Control indicator for Ope n&Start system 0

Central locking system, mechanical anti-the ft locking system 3

Eme rgency operation

Vauxhall alarm s yste m 3 Ele ctric windows 3

Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows

Locks, D oors, Windo ws

Central locking system

Radio fre quency re mote control synchronisation

Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows